Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (201 trang)

anh 8 tron bo

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.09 MB, 201 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Planning day : 13 / 08 / 2010
Teaching day : 16 / 08 / 2010
Period : 01


<b>revision</b>


<b>*Objective</b>


 By the end of the lesson , students will be able to remind some structures and know
how to learn English 8.


<i><b>*</b></i><b>Language content</b>


 Review some questions about : health , weather , people . . .
 Guide how to learn 4 skills : Listen , read , write , speak
<b>*Teaching aids </b>


 Text book , chalk , flash cards


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>


<b>A.Warm up </b>


*Play a game : Slap the board


<b>B.New lesson</b>


I.Presentation
*Review


+T asks sts some qs
 How are you ?



 What is the weather like today ?


 How many sts are there in your class ?
 What color is your hair . . .?


+Let sts answer the qs


a)Review the simple present
Is


To be Are
Am


 To-V : -Ngơi thứ 3 số ít ở thì hiện tại đơn + <s>


 Những động từ tận cùng bằng những chữ : ch , -s , -x , -z , o + <es >
Ex: watch - watches


Do - does


Fix - fixes
Brush - brushes ...


+The usage :


 Thì HTĐ dùng để diễn tả hành động lặp đi lặp lại nhiều lần , 1 thói quen sở thích ở
HT.


b)The simple past tense


*CÊu t¹o


<i><b> Đối với động từ có quy tắc ta thành lập thì quá khứ đơn bằng cách thêm “ed” vào </b></i>
sau động từ .


<b>Ex: like - liked</b>


Play - played


 Đối với động từ bất quy tắc , ta sử dụng cột 2 trong bảng động từ bất quy tắc
Ex: go - went


Arrangement


Stud
y


City
Past


Friends <sub>Countr</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

Begin - began


Ex : We saw him walk in the park 15 minutes a go
+The usage :


 Thì QKĐ diễn tả hành động xảy ra và chấm dứt hẳn trong 1 điểm tg , hoặc
khoảng tg xác định trong QK.



 Đi với thì QKĐ thờng có các trạng từ :yesterday , ago , last week / month /night
. . .


<i><b>2)Giíi thiƯu c¸ch häc </b></i>


 Đối với chơng trình TA 8 các kĩ năng đợc tách biệt rõ ràng


+Ngữ phap đợc coi là bộ phận cấu thành quan trong , nhng khg phải là mục đích cuối
cùng của việc dạy và học tiếng . ngữ pháp sẽ đợc giới thiệu trong ngữ cảnh thơng qua
các hoạt động nghe ,nói , đọc , viết khác nhau .


+Các chức năng ngôn ngữ : chào hỏi , đề nghị , xin phép . . . dợc giới thiệu qua các
bài hội thoại thơng qua 2 kĩ năng nói & nghe


<b>+Tõ vùng xuất hiện tự nhien theo các chủ điểm - häc theo chđ ®iĨm </b>


+Luyện phat âm : đợc tiến hành phối hợp các hoạt động , lời nói khác nh với việc dạy
từ mới , dạy nghe , dạy nói


+Các hoạt động nói : phối hợp với việc học phát âm , ngữ pháp từ vựng , các chức
năng ngôn ngữ & kĩ năng nghe


+Các hoạt đọng nghe :
+các hoạt động đọc :


+Các hoạt động viết : viết th , viết các mẫu khai , viết báo cáo ở dạng đơn giản
III.Home work


 Xem tríc unit 1 – getting started + listen and read .



Planning day : 14 / 08 / 2010
Teaching day : 17 / 08 /2010
Period : 02


<b>Unit 1 : My friends</b>



<b>Lesson 1: getting started + lisen & read</b>
<b>*Objective</b>


 By the end of the lesson , students will be able to :
Know about Hoa & Nien


<b>*Language content</b>


<i>1.Vocabs  (v) to seem , enough , </i>


<i>2.Structure : - S + be + (not) + adj + enough + to V-inf </i>
<b>*Teaching aids</b>


 Text book , extraboard , a ball ,


<b>*Teaching procedure </b>


<b>Content</b> <b> Activities</b>
<b>A.Warm up </b>


<i><b>*Chatting</b></i>


<i>-what are these sts doing ?</i>
<i>-What time of the day do you </i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

<i> think it is ?</i>


<i>Do you like soccer/read book ?</i>
<i>Who do you like playing with ?</i>


<b>B.New lesson </b>


<i>I.Presentation</i>


*Hoa : live with her uncle and
aunt


She is studying at QT schhool
She is from Hue


<i><b>+ Vocabs</b></i>


- seem (v) :dờng nh.
-enough (adv): đủ
-receive (v) : nhận đợc


<i>II.Practice</i>


* Reading dialogue
<i><b>+ Questions</b></i>


1. Is Nien Lan’s friend or Hoa
friend ?



2. How old is Nien ?
3. Where does Nien live ?
4. Is she a beautiful girl ?
*Answer the questions


1. She is Hoa’s friend
2. She is 12 years old
3. She lives in Hue
4. Yes , she is


*Comprehension questions
1. Nien lives in Hue
2. No , she doesn’t


3. The sentence is “She wasn’t
old enough to be in my class
4. At christmas


<i> III.Production</i>


Give sentence with “ enough”


She wasn’t old enough to be in my
class


-I am tall enough to reach on the
top of the board


Recall your friend



+ T gives sts some qs
- Sts work in pairs .


+ Call some pairs to check


+ T introduces the situation then ask sts to
orgnize about Hoa


+ Ask sts some qs around Hoa
- Sts answer


+ T writes the answer on the board


+ T plays the tape Let sts close the books
and listen


+ T asks sts to open their book and find out
the vocabs


-Sts write vocabs and read inchoral and
individual


+ T give sts some qs and ask them to work
in pairs to answer them


- Sts work in pairs to answer
+ T corrects sts mistakes


+ T plays the tape once then ask sts to read
the dialogue between Hoa , Lan , Nien


(p.10) and check the answer


- Sts play the role to read the dialogue


+ Ask sts to read the dialogue again then
answer the qs in exercise 2(p.11)


+ T explains about “enough”
- Sts take note


+ T asks sts to give more examples


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

Learn vacabs, read dialogue &redo all exs.


*Comment :...
...
*Kí duyệt của chuên môn:


Planning day : 16 / 08 / 2010
Teaching day : 19 / 08 / 2010
Period : 03


<b>Unit 1 : My friends</b>



<b>Lesson 2 : Speak & Listen</b>
<b>*Objective</b>


 By the end of the lesson students will be able to describe some one and listen to
complete the dialogue .



<b>*Language content:</b>


 vacabs: (adj) blond , curly , fair , slim , straight
+grammar:


<b>*Teaching aids .</b>


 Textbook , extraboard , flashcards , radio


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>


<b> Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>I.Warm up </b>


<i><b>*Brainstorming</b></i>


Fat thin slim


Tall short oval
+.Checking the old lesson


+Read the dialogue and answer
some qs


<b>B.New lesson</b>


<b> Speaking</b>


<i>I.Pre </i>–<i> speaking </i>



<i><b>*Vocabs </b></i>


-Curly (a) xoăn ( tóc)
-Blond (a )vàng hoe


-Fair (a) trắng vàng nhạt
-Slim (a ) mảnh mai
-Straight (a) thẳng
Ex:


-He has short blond hair
<i> S has adj n</i>
-He is short and thin


T guides Ss to do .
Ss work in groups.
T checks.


+T reads and write vocabs let sts
read vocabs in choral and individual
+T shows sts a picture of Lam
Truong and ask sts to describe his
hair and the body


-Sts describe


+Teacher writes on the board then
explain



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

Form


S + has/have +adj + hair
S + tobe + adj . . .


<i>II.While </i>–<i> speaking</i>


<i><b>a)Word cue drill</b></i>


a. He / tall / thin
b. She / short / slim
c. He / short / fat
d. Long / black
e. Curly blond
f. Straight / brown
<i><b>b)Speak 1 :</b></i>


<i><b>ex:</b></i>


S1 : This person is short and thin,
she has long black hair


S2 : Is this Mary ?
S1 : Yes


<i>III.Post </i>–<i> speaking</i>


<i><b>*Guessing game</b></i>
<b> Listen</b>



<i>I.Pre </i>–<i> Listening</i>


-What do you say if you are
introduces to someone ?
-What will you say when you
introduce someone ?


<i><b>*Câu giới thiệu và đáp lại lời giới </b></i>
<i><b>thiệu</b></i>


+I’d like to meet . ..
+How do you do ?
-Nice to meet you
+I’d like you to meet
-Come and meet


<i>II.While </i>–<i> Listening</i>


1. I’d like you to meet
2. Nice to see you
3. I’d like you to meet
4. It is please to meet you
5. Come and meet


6. How do you do ?


<i>III.Post </i>–<i> Listening</i>


+T prepare 6 cards so that sts can
drill easily



-Sts make sentences
+T corrects sts’ mistakes


+Ask sts to look at 6 pictures
<p.11-12>


+Call on a student to describe one
person , the others have to guess
who she/he is


-Sts describe , the others guess sts
go on until1( 6 people on the poster
are described)


+Ask sts to describe a famous
person or one of their classmates
and their friends have to guess
-Sts describe


+T ask sts some qs to introduce new
lesson


+Let sts read the model


+T gives 4 dialogues on extraboard
and ask sts to read , encourage them
to guess and complete 4 dialogues
-Sts work in pairs to read the
dialogue then guess



+Let sts listen to the tape twice
-Sts listen


+Ask sts to work in pairs to


complete the dialogue and compare
with their prediction


-Sts work in pairs


+Call some pairs to read the
dialogue


+T corrects sts’ pronun
+Ask sts to make a similar
dialogues with their friends
-Sts work in groups of 3


+Call some groups to play the role
teacher corrects sts’ mistakes


<b>*summary: T</b> asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework</b>


Learn vacabs &redo all exs.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

<b>*Comment</b>…………<b>:...</b>
...
<b>*Kí duyệt của chuên môn:</b>



Planning day : 20 / 08 / 2010
Teaching day : 23 /08 / 2010
Period 04


<b>Unit 1 : My friends</b>



<b>Lesson 3 : Read</b>


*<b>Objective </b>


 By the end of the lesson , students will be able toknow more about Ba’s friends
and know some more adj to describe someone.




<b>*Language content:</b>


 vacabs: (n) character , a joke , an orphanage


(adj) generous , reserved , slim , sociable , volunteer
+grammar:


<i><b>*</b></i><b>Teaching aids</b>


 Text book , extraboard , pictures


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>


<b> Content</b> <b> Activities</b>



<b>I.Warm up </b>


<i><b>*Chatting </b></i>


<i>-Do you have any friends ?</i>
<i>-Can you introduce about them ?</i>


<b>II. New lesson</b>


<i>I.Pre </i>–<i> reading</i>


<i><b>a)Vocabs</b></i>


- Character (n) tính tình
- Orphanage (n) trại trẻ mồ côi
- Reserved (a) kín đáo


- Sociable = out going cëi më . . .
- Joke (n) chun hµi
- Sense of humor (a) tÝnh hµi híc
- Generous (a) rộng lợng


-Volunteer (n) tình ngun
- Annoy (v) lµm bùc m×nh
*Ba’s friends :- Bao


- Khai - reserved
- Song - sociable



+Ask sts some qs about their friends and
let sts tell some things about them


+T introduces then gives sts some vocabs
+Let sts repeat in choral and individual
-Sts read vocabs and write in note book
+T corrects sts’ pronoun


+T shows a picture about Khai , Song , &
Bao to ask sts to guess about their


characters


-Sts look at the picture and guess


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

<i><b>b)T/F predictions</b></i>


1. Ba only has 3 friends Bao , Khai ,
Song


2. Ba and his friends have the same
character .


3. Bao , Khai , Song are quiet
reserved in puble .


4. They all enjoy school and study
hard .


<i>II.While </i>–<i> Reading </i>



<i><b>a)Correct T/F statements</b></i>


Guess correct
1.


2.
3.
4.


F
F
F
T


<i><b>b) Multiple choice</b></i>


-Doesn’t affect his school work
<i>(Không ảnh hởng đến việc học )</i>
<i>-Get tired of (nhàm chán )</i>
A – A d – D


B - C c – A


<i><b>c)Comprehension questions</b></i>


a . He feels lucky having a lot of friends
b . Bao is the most sociable


c . Khai likes reading



d . His jokes sometimes ennoy his
friends


e . Bao spends his freetime doing
volinteers works at a local orphanage
f . < sts answer >


<i>III.Post </i>–<i> reading </i>


Recall your close friend.


+T reads the text first
-Sts listen


+T asks sts to read the text <p.13>
-Sts read silent then check their
prediction


+ Get sts to do exercise 1 <p.14>
In pairs to choose the right answer
-Sts do exercise


+Let sts work in pairs to do exercise 2
<p.14>


-Sts read the text then answer the qs
+Call some sts to answer aloud
+T corrects sts’ mistakes



+Ask sts to talk about their friends using
adj they have learnt to describe


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .


 <b>Homework</b>


Learn vacabs &redo all exs.


Write a para about their friends 5 sentences


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

Planning day : 21 / 08 / 2010
Teaching day : 24 / 08 / 2010
Period 05


<b>Unit 1 : My friends</b>



<b>Lesson 4 : Write</b>


*<b>Objective</b>


 By the end of the lesson , students will be able to write a paragraph about their
close friends .


*<b>Language content:</b>
<b>*Teaching aids</b>


 Text book , picture
<b>*Teaching procedure .</b>



<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A.Warm-up: </b>


<b>Kim s game</b>’


Look at the pictures and describe
the people in the picture (p.17)


<i>- How many people are there in the </i>
<i>picture?</i>


<i>- What is each person weaning?</i>


<b>B.New lesson .</b>


<i>I. Pre-writing:</i>


a- Read the information about
Tam.


b- Answer the questions (exercise
2 p.15).


<i>II. While-writing:</i>


<i>a)Fill in a similar form for your </i>


<i>partner</i>



Name : Vu Thi Mai
Age: 14


Appearence : tall , thin , . . .
Characters : sociable , . . .
Address : 40 Hang Bai street


Family : mother , father , brother . . .
Friends : Thu , Vui . ..


<i>b)Write a paragraph about their </i>


<i>friends</i>


*Example:


His / Her name is...She
is...years old. He / She lives
at...in...with his...He / She is
tall,...


He / She has short...hair
He / She has a lot of friends


+ Ask Ss to look at the picture
(p.17) quickly. Then let Ss keep
their books closed.


+ Divide the class in to 4 groups.
The group which answers



correctly the fastest wins the
game.


+ Ask Ss to read the information
about Tam then answer the
questions.


-Sts read the para about Tam
+Let Ss write some information
about one of their friends , then
write a paragraph about him/her


+ Let Ss write a paragraph about
one of their friends.


-Sts write about their friends
+ Get Ss to share with their
partners and correct if possible.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<i>III. Post-writing:</i>


-Speak in front of the class about
himself / herself.


+Call sts to speak about their
friends


-Sts tell about their friends
+T corrects the mistakes if


possible.


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework </b>


Ask students to write another paragraph about one of their family members.


<b>*Comment:...</b>
...
*KÝ duyệt của chuên môn:


Planning day : 27 / 08 / 2010
Teaching day : 30 / 08 / 2010
Period 06


<b>Unit 1 : My friends</b>
<b>Lesson 5 :Language focus</b>
<b>*Objective:</b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use simple present tense to talk
about general truths and write some sentences using the structure (not) + adjective
enough + to-infinitive.


<b>*language content:</b>
+vacabs:


+grammar: Simple tenses.


Present simple to talk about general truths
(not) adj +enough + to-inf



<b>*Teaching aids: </b>


Text book - cards - pictures.
<b>*</b>Teaching procedure:


<b>Content</b> <b> Activities</b>


<b>A.Warm-up:</b>
<i><b> Categories</b></i>


<i>*Find out the adjectives </i>
<i>beginning with the letters </i>
<i>given.</i>


+ T writes: a b c d
+ S writes: awful big clever disty.


<b>B. New lesson</b>


<b>I. Presentation:</b>
<i><b>a.Vocabulary.</b></i>


- A planet: (ex: the sun, the moon,
the earth,…)


What are they?


- Mars (n)



+ Divide the class in to two
groups.


+ Ask Ss to find out the adjectives
- Find out the adjectives beginning
with the letters given.


+Present and give the meaming of
new words.


- Sts listen and repeat


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

- Mercury (n)
- Silly (adj)
<i><b>b)Structures</b></i>


<i>*Revision of simple Present tense.</i>
-The sunple present tense is used
to express an action which is
always true.


Form:


a) I / You / We / They + V-inf.
b) He / She / It + Vs


( o, sh, ch, x , s, )


I go to school=> Binh goes to


school.


<i>*Enough :</i>
Ex:


T.Can you hang this picture here ?
S : No, I’m not tall enough to hang
S be adj to-v-inf
Form


S+be (not) adj+enough + to+V-inf


<i>II. Practice.</i>


Ex1:Comple the paragraphs. Use
the correct form of the verbs.
a) 1.lived 3.was
2.sent 4. is
b) 1.are 3.showed
2.came 4.introduced
Ex2:Use the correct form to
complete the dialogue .
1.sets 4.is
2.moves 5.is
3.goes 6.is


Ex4:Use (not) adj + enough to
complete the dialogue.
b)Ba is not old enough to drive a
car



c)I’m strong enough to lift this
box.


d)my English is good enough to be
a member.


<i>III. Production</i>


Ex3. Discrible the people


- Review the simple present tense


- Set the scene to introduce the
structure.


- Model two cues, the whole class
repeats.


+T asks sts some qs to check their
understanding


<i>-Is <I> S ?</i>
<i>-Is <am> tobe ?</i>
<i>-Is <tall> a or n ?</i>


<i>-After(enough) is V-inf or V-ing? </i>
<i>-What does this sentence mean ?</i>
<i>-How about the form ?</i>



+ Let all students, work in pairs,
one asks, the other answers.
- Practise the structure in pairs.


+ Ask Ss to do exercise 4 on page
17 in pairs.


+Give feed back.
- Practise the dialogue


beginning with the letters given in
groups.


Ss work in groups .
T checks.


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .


<b>*Homework </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

“(not) adjective enough + to infinitive”.


<b>*Comment:...</b>
...
<b>*Kí duyệt của chuên môn:</b>


Planning day : 28 / 08 / 2010
Teaching day : 31 / 08 / 2010
Period : 07



<b>Unit 2 : Making arrangements</b>



<b>Lesson 1 : Getting started + Listen and read</b>
<b>*Objective .</b>


 By the end of the lesson , students will be able to talk about intentions Use
telephone to make and confirm arrangements


Take a telephone message
<i><b>*</b></i><b>Teaching content</b>


<i>1.Vocabs :downstairs,</i>


<i>2.Grammar :Can I speak to Hoa please?</i>
Would you like to come?


Where is it on?
Is 6.30 all right?
<b>*Teaching aids </b>


 Textbook , picture , extraboard , flashcards
<b>*</b>Teaching procedure


<b> Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A.Warm-up: </b>


<i>Matching</i>


<i>Match each object (pictures on page </i>


<i> 18) with its name.</i>
a+ an answering machine


b+a mobile phone
c+a fax machine


d+a telephone directory
e+a puplic telephone
f+an address book


<b>B.New lesson</b>


<i>I.Pre-reading:</i>


<i> Downstairs :tÇng díi.</i>


Can I speak to Hoa please?
Would you like to come?
Where is it on?


Is 6.30 all right?
*Open prediction.


+ Ask Ss to match each object with its
name.


- Do exercises (p. 18).


+ Show the picture and ask “What are
they doing?



- Look at the picture and answer the
questions.


Introduced: They are talking about
going to see a movie.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

a. Who made the call?
b. Who introduced herself?


c. Who invited the other to the movies?
d. Who arranged a meeting places?
e. Who arrange the time?


f. Who agreed to the time?


<i>II. While-reading:</i>


<i>@.1.Read the conversation.</i>


<i>@.2.Check their prediction.</i>
<i>a.Nga made the call</i>


bNga introduced herself


c.Nga arranged a meeting place
d.Hoa arranged the time


f.Nga agreed to the time



<i>III. Post-reading:</i>


<i>*Practice the conversation, using the </i>


<i>frame:</i>


S1: …


S2: Can I speak ….? This …
S1: …


S2: I’m going to see … Would you…?
S1: Of course. But I have to ask…Hold
on….OK….says I can go, Where’s it
on?


S2: At… Movie threatre.
S1: Let’s go by…


S2: OK. Let’s meet outside the threatre.
S1: Is … OK?


S2: All right. See you at…Bye.
S1: Bye.


+ Ask Ss to guess.


- Read the question and guess.


+T plays the tape (2 times) asks sts to


read the conversation


+Call some sts to read aloud
+Correct sts’ pronun


+Let Ss to read the conversation. Give
the correct answers.


+Read the conversation and check their
prediction


- Read the conversation and answer the
questions


+ Give feetback


+ Let Ss practice the conversation
using the frame given.


+ Move around the class and help the
students.


.


-Do exercises.


-Practice the conversation.


<b> *summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
 <b>Homework </b>Read the dialogue and make a similar dialogue



Prepare speak


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

Planning day : 03 / 09 / 2010
Teaching day : 06 / 09 / 2010
Period : 08


<b>Unit 2 : Making arrangements</b>



<b>Lesson 2 : Speak & listen</b>
<b>*Objective:</b>


 By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk on the phone about intensions
with “going to”. Complete a telephone message by listening


<i><b>*</b></i><b>Teaching content</b>
 Teaching aids:


 Text books, cards , radio


<b>*Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>content</b> <b>activities</b>


<b>AWarm-up:</b>


*Chatting.


<i>- Do you have a telephone at home?</i>
<i>- How often do you make a phone call?</i>


<i>- What would you say when you pick up </i>
<i>the phone to answer it?</i>


<i>- What would you say if you are the </i>
<i>caller?</i>


<b>B.New lesson</b>


<b> Speak</b>
I. Pre- speaking<b> </b>


<i><b>a)Do exercise 1 on page 20.</b></i>


1 – b 2 – f 3 – j 4
– a


5 – i 6 – c 7 – e 8
– k


9 – g 10 – h 11 – d


Ex : We are going to study Math
S be v-inf
Form: S + be + going to + V -inf


 Use: Express an intension.


+ Ask Ss some questions.


- Listen and answer the questions



+ Ask Ss to do exercise 1 on page
20.
- Put the sentences in the correct
order to make a complete


conversation


- Listen and answer the questions
+Give feetback.


+Ask some question to check Ss’
understanding and focus on the
structure.


<i>- Are they talking on the phone?</i>
<i>- What do they intend to do?</i>
<i>- What time are they meeting? </i>
<i>Where?</i>


<i>- What form of the verbs do you use</i>
<i>to talk about intent?</i>


+Give an example first


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

II.While - speaking
<i><b>a)Word cue drill.</b></i>
Ex:


- Are you going to see a movie?


- Yes, I am / no, I’m not.


a. See a movie.
b. B. Play sport.


c. C. Meet your friends.
d. D. Help your mother.
e. E. Do your homeworks.
f. F. Watch TV.


<i><b>*Do exercise 2 on page 20.</b></i>
Key:


Bao :May I speak to Ba please .This is
Bao ?


Bao : I’m fine , thanks .And you ?
Bao : Can you play chess tonight ?
Bao : What about tomorrow afternoon ?
Bao : I’ll meet you at the central


Bao :Is 2 o’clock Ok .
<i><b>*Practice the dialogue.</b></i>


<b> Listen</b>
I.Pre – Listening
<i><b>*Chatting</b></i>


<i>What will you say if you are the caller ?</i>
<i>-What will you say if you are the </i>



<i> receiver ?</i>
<i>-What will you say if you are the person </i>
<i>you want to speak to is out ?</i>


<i><b>*Model sentences </b></i>


-Can I leave a message for . . . ?
-Can you take a message . . . ?


-Would you like to leave a message ?
-Make an appointment : hĐn gỈp
-To be vailable : r¶nh


2.While – listening
*Answer key :


For : The principal


Message : Mrs.Mary Nguyen wanted to
see you at 9.45 in the morning


Telephone number :6 4 8 3 7 2 0 9 4 2


+ Let Ss practice asking and
answering.


+ Ask the whole class to work in
pairs.



.


+Let Ss work in pairs.
T checks


+ Ask Ss to work with their partners
to complete the dialogue.


- Practice in pairs
+T corrects sts pronoun


+Let sts find find the sentences we
usually speak on the phone and give
sts some phraral


+Ask sts to look at the form of the
telephone message (p.21)


+T sets the scence “ A woman
phoned the principal of Kingston
Junior high school , but she was
out”


+Have sts guess the message
-Sts guess


+T plays the tape <3 times>
-Sts listen and complete the form
+Ask sts to compare with their
partners



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

3.Post – listening
<i><b>*Correct mistakes</b></i>


1.Can I speak with Mr.Trung , please ?
2.I’d like to do an appointment with the
dentist


3.Would you like to leave a message ?
4.He will be available in Monday .


+T gives the correct answers


+Let sts correct mistakes
-Sts correct


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework </b>: Make a dialogue like speak


<b>*Comment:...</b>
<b>*Kí duyệt của chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning : 03 / 09 / 2010
Date of teaching : 07 / 09 / 2010
Period : 09


<b>Unit 2 : Making arrangements</b>



<b>Lesson 3 : Read</b>
<b>*Objective</b>



 By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know more about Alexander
Graham Bell


<b>*Teaching content:</b>
<b>+vacabs :</b>


+grammar: Past simple
*<b>Teaching aids:</b> A visual aid


- Posters , extraboard


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>


<b> Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


<b>A.Warm up </b>


<i><b>*Brainstorming</b></i>


To chat with friends
To communicate


To call someone +T asks sts to answer the qs by coming
the the board and write the benefit of
the telephone


15
What is the



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

To make arrangements


To talk to a person who lives far from


<b>B.New lesson </b>


<i>I.Pre </i>–<i> reading</i>


<i><b>a)Vocabs</b></i>


-Emigrate (v) xuÊt c¶nh , di c
-Experiment (v) cc thư nghiƯm
-Transmit (v) truyền phát (tín hiệu)
-Deaf-mutes (n) tật vừa câm vừa điếc
-Invention (n) sự phát minh


-Assistant (n) phụ tá
-Conducte (v) điều khiÓn
-Device (n) thiÕt bị
-Desmonstrate (n) = show
-Countless (n) vô số
-Exhibition (n) triển lÃm
-Commercial (a) thơng mại
<i><b>b)Checking vocabs</b></i>


-Slap the board
<i><b>c)T/F prediction</b></i>


1. Alexender was born in the USA
2. He worked with deaf-mute



patient in a hospital in Boston
3. Thomas wastson was Bell’


assistant


4. Bell and Wastson introduced the
telephone in 1877


5. Bell experimented with ways of
transmitting speech between
deaf-mutes over a long distance
6. Bell demonstrated his invention


at alot of exhibitions


<i>II.While </i>–<i> reading </i>


<i><b>a)Check T/F prediction</b></i>


1. F ->He was born in Edinburgh
2. F ->He worked with deaf-mute


patients at Boston University
3. T


4. F ->He introduced the telephone
in 1876


5. F ->He experimented speech


over a long distance .


6. T
<i><b>b)Ordering</b></i>


-Sts write in 2 teams which team has
more words is the winner




+T read the text first , let sts underline
vocabs


+T reads vocabs and explaints
-Sts repeat , guess meaning


+Let sts read chorally and individually


+T writes the words in English , divide
class in to 2 teams


+T reads words
-Sts slap in the words


+T hangs the poster of T/F prediction
on the board and ask sts to work in
pairs and guess which are T/F
-Sts guess T/F before reading


+T reads the text


-Sts look at the book


+Let sts read silently , check their
prediction


-Sts read


+Have sts correct F statements


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

1 – d 2 – e 3 – a 4
– g


5 – c 6 – b 7 – f
<i><b>III.Post </b></i>–<i><b> reading </b></i>


Recall Bell’s invention.


then read the events of Bell’life and put
them in the correct order


-Sts do exercise then compare with
their partners


+T asks sts to recall about Bell by look
at the events of Bell


-Sts recall


+Call one or 2 sts recall before the
class.



<b>*summary: T</b> asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework </b>: Learn vocabs / the events


Prepare write


*<b>Comment:...</b>
<b>*KÝ duyệt của chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning : 06 / 09 / 2010
Date of teaching : 09 / 09 / 2010
Period : 10


<b>Unit 2 : Making arrangements</b>



<b>Lesson 4 :Write</b>
<b>*Objective</b>


By the end of the lesson , students will be able to write a message in the phone


<b>*languge content:</b>
<i><b>*</b></i><b>Teaching aids </b>


 Text book , extra board
<b>*Teaching procedure </b>


<b>Content</b> <b>Activities</b>


A.Warm up
<i><b>*Slap the board</b></i>



B.New lesson
I.Pre – writing
-Date , time


-Who sent , to whom , content


+Divide sts in to 2 teams let sts play
game


T checks


+Talk to sts about taking a phone
mesage


-Have you ever take a telephone
Time


Taken by Message


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

<i><b>a)Vocabs</b></i>


<i>-Delivery service :DÞch vơ giao hàng</i>
<i>-Customer (n) khách hàng</i>


<i>-Stationary (n) dùng văn phòng</i>
<i>-Furniture delivery :chuyển giao đồ </i>
đạc
<i><b>b)Read the message</b></i>



<i><b>c)Fill in the gap</b></i>
1. phone
2. May 12th
3. speak
4. took
5. name
6. delivery
7. Mr.Ha
8. at


<i><b>d)Read the passage</b></i>
II.While – writing


<i><b>*Write the telephone message .</b></i>
Thanh cong delivery service
<i>Date : June 16th</i>


<i>Time : after midday</i>
<i>For : Mrs.Van</i>


<i>Message : Mr.Tam called about his </i>


<i>stationary order . He wanted you to </i>
<i>call him at 8634082</i>


<i>Taken by : Mr.Toan</i>
III.Post – writing


<i><b>*Use the information from the </b></i>
<i><b>dialogue to write a message .</b></i>


<i>Date : ( hs tù ®iỊn )</i>


Time : ( )


<i>For : Nancy</i>


<i>Message : Tom called about playing </i>


<i>tennis this afternoon . He will come </i>
<i>over to pick you up at 1.30</i>


<i>Taken by : Lisa .</i>


message ?


-When you take a message what should
be mentioned in message ?


+T explains some vocabs


+Ask sts to read the message and fill in
the gap (p.23)


-Sts read silently


+Have sts fill in the gaps in the passage
-Sts do exercise


+Let sts compare with their friends
+Call sts to give the answer and correct


+Let sts read the passage to get


information
-Sts read


+Call 1 or 2 sts read
+Have sts write a message


-Sts write individually then compare
with a partner


+Call some sts to read their message in
order to check their writing


+T sets the scence “Tom phoned Nancy
but she was out > Lisa , Nancy’s sister
took a message for Nancy .Help Lisa to
write a message”


-Sts listen


+Ask sts to read the dialogue between
Lisa and Tom then write the message
-Sts read in pairs then write the
message


+Call some sts to read their message


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework :</b> Write the message on the note books



Do exercise 5,6,7


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

Date of planning : 10 / 09 / 2010
Date of teaching : 13 / 09 / 2010
Period : 11


<b>Unit 2 : Making arrangements</b>



<b>Lesson 5 : Language focus</b>
<b>*Objectives : </b>


By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about intentions with “Be
going to” ,adv of palce.


<b>*language content :</b>


Talk about inventions with “ be going to “
Adv of place.


<i><b>*</b></i><b>Teaching aids</b><i><b> </b></i>


- text books, clear paper, pictures
<b>*Teaching procedure</b>


<i><b>Content</b></i> <i><b>Activities</b></i>


<b>A.Warm up</b>


Eg:- What are you going to do this


weekend?


S1: I’m going to visit my grandparents in
Hanoi


S2: I’m going to….


<b>B. New lesson </b>


<i><b>I. Presentation</b></i>


<i><b>a.The simple future tense</b></i>
Ex:


- My friends will go to HN next Sunday
Form:


+ S + will+ V .
- S + will not + V
? Will + S + V ?


Meaning:


+T asks some qs
-Ss: answer


+T gives sts example then ask sts
some qs to check sts’understanding
-Is <my friends > S ?



-Is <go> V-inf or V-ing ?


+T asks sts to give the form , the
meaning and then make similar
sentences


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

<i>- Diến tả hành động sẽ xảy ra trong tơng </i>


<i>lai , đợc quyết định ngay tại thời điểm </i>
<i>nói, khơng có sự sắp xếp và chuẩn bị </i>
<i>tr-ớc.</i>


<i><b>b.Be going to</b></i>
Form


S + be( am,is, are) + going to + V-inf
S + be not + going to +V-in
Be + S + going to + V-inf… ?
<i>Meaning: Hành động sẽ xảy ra trong </i>


<i>t-ơng lai, hành động này có sự sắp xếp và </i>
<i>chuẩn bị trớc một cách kỹ lỡng.</i>


* Adverds of places:


eg: - Mary isn’t here


<i> - Cho biÕt sù viƯc x¶y ra ở đâu, thờng </i>


<i>ng cui cõu, thng ng trớc adv </i>


<i>chỉ thời gian( here, there, inside, </i>


<i>upstairs, downstairs</i>


<i><b>II.Practice</b></i>


<i><b>a)Work with a partner say what the </b></i>
<i><b> people are going to do</b></i>


a.They are going fishing


b.She is going to read a new novel
c.She is going to do her homework in
Math


d.He is going to watch an interesting
action movie tonight


e.She is going to her friend’s birthday
party


<i><b>b) Add more activties to the list</b></i>


Are you going you your partner
see a movie? x x


play sport?


meet your friends?
Help your parents?



S1: Are you going to see a movie this
weekend?


S2: Yes, I am. And you?
S1: I am going to see a movie
<i><b>III.Production</b></i>


<i><b>* Complete the speech bubbles</b></i>


Ex:


+ He is going to Hanoi next Sunday.
- He is not going to Hanoi next
Sunday


? Is He going to Hanoi next Sunday
What is he going to do nextSunday?
Sts make sentences


+T gives examples then explain
-Is (Mary) S ?


-Is (is) tobe ?
-Is (here) adv ?


- Sts work in pairs


+T calls on some Ss to do on the
board



+T guides for Ss how to do ex
-Sts copy and do the ex in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

a. upstairs
b. here


c. downstairs
d. outside
e. there
f. inside


the adverbs


-Sts work in pairs to complete, then
read loudly


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework </b>:Redo all Exs


Have a look at Unit 3( getting started- Listen and read)


<b>*Comment:...</b>
<b>*KÝ dut cđa chuyªn m«n</b>


Date of planning : 11 / 09 / 2010
Date of teaching : 14 / 09 / 2010
Period : 12


<b>Unit 3: At home</b>




<b>lesson 1 :Getting started </b>–<b> listen and read</b>


*.<b>Objectives </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:
Describe positions of things


Give advices.


Tell that somebody must or should do, causes and effect.
*<b>Teaching content</b>


<i> 1.Vocabulary: </i>
<i> 2.Structures:</i>


Reflexive pronouns


Model verbs: must, have to, ought to
*<b>Teaching aids</b>


Stereo , Pictures , cards , Small board
*Teaching procedure


<b>Content</b> <b> Activites </b>


A.Warm up


a. wash dishes/ do the washing up
b. make the bed



c. sweep the floor
d. cook


e. tidy up


<b>B. New lesson </b>


<i><b>I.Presentation</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- chore (n) viƯc nhµ
Ex : I have to wash dishes
-Cupboard (n) chạn bát
-Ought to (v) nên
-Frying pan (n)chảo


-Steamer (n) nåi hÊp, nåi ¸p suÊt
-Under (prep) díi , ë díi


-Sink (n) chËu bån
-Sauce pan (n) nåi


-Rice cooker (n) nồi cơm điện
-Store (n) lß bÕp


-Have /Has to (v) ph¶i


I have to teach English at school.


<i><b>b)Slap the board</b></i>


<i><b>II. Practice</b></i>


<i><b>a)Practice the dialogue with a</b></i>
<i><b>partner </b></i>


<i><b>b) Complete the list of things Nam</b></i>
<i><b>has to:</b></i>


- cook dinner
- go to the market


- buy fish and vegetables


- call his aunt, Mrs Chi and ask
her to meet his mother at
Grandma’s house.


<i><b>III.Production</b></i>


<i><b>* Now write a passage about the</b></i>
<i><b>chores you often do at home.</b></i>


- look after brother/sister
- water vegetables


- lay/clear dining table(v) dọn
bàn ăn.



T : gives sts some vocabs let sts read in
choral and individual


Ss : read


T : corrects sts’pronun


T sets the sence of the dialogue
between Nam and his mother then play
the tape twice


Ss listen to the tape


T : calls some sts play the role aloud
before the class


T : asks Ss to complete the list of the
things Nam has to do.


Ss list the things Nam has to do in pairs
T : calls sts to write on the board


T : corrects mistakes


T: asks some qs


Eg: what is she doing?/Is she……….?
Ss: answer/then practice the hew words
* T : what do you have to do at home?
T: asks Ss to write



Ss: write and then speak their
sentences aloud.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

Have a look at Unit 3( speak )


<b>*Comment</b>:...
<b>*Kí duyệt của chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning : 13 / 09 / 2010
Date of teaching : 16 / 09 / 2010
Period : 13


<b>Unit 3 : At home</b>



<b>Lesson 2 : speak</b>
<b>*Objectives </b>


By the end of the lesson students will be able to use the prepositions of furniture
in the house


<b>*language content:</b>


+vacabs: rug , cushions , calendar….


<b>*Teaching aids :</b> Ss’ books, clear paper, pictures, cards


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>



<b>Content</b> <b>Activites</b>


<b>A.Warm up</b>


- find out the prepositions
in


on


in the corner of
next to


above> <beneath
around…


<b>B. New lesson </b>


<i>I. Presentation</i>


<i><b>a)Vocabulary ( things in the picture)</b></i>
- lights (n) đèn chùm


- plate (n) đĩa


- refrigerator (n) tđ l¹nh
- bowl of fruit (n) bát quả
- fry-pan (n) chảo rán
- counter (n)


- dish rack (n) giá để đĩa



Ss give out the preps
T checks


Ss: read the preps they have found
. Then work in pairs to talk about the
preposition of things in the kitchen


T: ask Ss to look at the picture and list
the things in it.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

- flower vase (n) b×nh hoa
<i><b>b)Model sentences </b></i>


-Let’s put the armchair next to the ...
Let’s V-inf


-You should / ought to ...
V-inf
Eg: -The fruit is in the bowl


The plate is on the table


The rice cooker is on the counter ,
next to the disk rack.
The pot, saucepan and fry pan are
on the wall, above the stove


<i>II..Practice</i>



* Things Mrs Vui bought:
- Rug


- picture
- lamp
- telephone
- armchair
- stereo
- cushion
- shelf


- coffee table
- magazines


<i>Eg: </i>


S1: Let’s put the armchair opposite the
couch


S2: Ok.I think we ought to put the rug
between the armchair and the couch.


<i>III. Production</i>


<i><b>Describe your living room or</b></i>
<i><b> bed room</b></i>


T: gives sts some model sentences
Ss : take note



T: ask Ss to list the things Mrs Vui
bought


Ss: work in pairs


T: ask Ss to repeat some preps of place.
Ss: opposite, between, against, on, in
front of, above…


Ss: practice in pairs .
T: call on some pairs


Ss: work group . then 1 or two Ss speak
in front of the class.


Let sts prepare 3 minutes then call
some sts to tell about their house


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework </b>:Write a dialogue like speak 2


Have a look at Unit 3( Listen & Language Forcus 4 )


<b>*Comment:...</b>
<b>*KÝ dut cđa chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning : 18 / 09 / 2010
Date of teaching :


Period :14



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

<b>Lesson 3 : Listen + language focus 4</b>
<b>*Objctives:</b>


<i> By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice listening skill</i>
<b>*language content:</b>


+vacabs:


+grammar: Why- Because


<i><b>*Teaching aids : Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards… </b></i>
<b>*Teaching procedure</b>


<b>Content</b> <b> Activites </b>


<b>A Warm up</b>


Describe the things in your living room


<b>B.New lesson </b>


<i><b>I</b>. Pre-speaking</i>


<i><b>* Vocabulary</b></i>


- sausepan(n) ch¶o sèt
- garlic (n) tái


- onion (n) hµnh



- green peppers( n) ít xanh
- ham (n)


- special chinese Fried rice (n)
cơm rang dơng châu TQ


<i><b>*Guessing</b></i>


<i>II. White- speaking</i>


<i><b>a, Listen to the tape 3 times and choose</b></i>
<i><b>the ingredients to cook the special</b></i>
<i><b>chinese Fried rice food</b></i>


Keys:


a. fried rice
b. pan


c. garlic and green peppers
d. ham and peas


<i><b>b,Put the sentences in the correct order </b></i>
a. wait until the pan hot


b. Put the ham and the peas in
c. Use a big pan


d. Then fry the garlic and green peppers


e. Put the little oil in pan


f. Finally put the rice and a teaspoon of
salt in .


<b>a </b>–<b> 3 b </b>–<b> 5 c </b>–<b> 1 d </b>–<b> 4 e </b>–<b> 2</b>


Ss: answer the Qs given


Ss: 1-2 Ss describe in front of the
class.


T aks Ss to name the objects in the
picture Ss: work in pairs to name the
objects


Ss: copy then repeat after the teacher


T: asks Ss to guess what ingredients
they need to cook


Ss: disscuss in group


Ss: listen to the tape 3 times . then
compare the answer with their
partners


T: asks 1 to read her or his answer
aloud.



T plays the tape once more time let
sts listen and do T/F statements


Ss listen and do exercise
T let sts gives the answer


T corrects then gives the correct
answer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

<b>f </b>–<b> 6</b>


<i>III.Post-speaking</i>


<i><b>-Answer the Qs and then write a short</b></i>
<i><b>paragraph about cooking Vietnamese</b></i>“
<i><b>fried rice”</b></i>


- Do you like V fried rice?
- How do we cook it?


- What can we use to cook it?
- When do we eat it?


<b>Language focus 4</b>


Why – Because


b) Why did Nam have to cook diner?
Because his mother came home late.
c) Why did Mrs Vui come home late?


Because she visited her sick mother.


………..


write


Ss: work in pairs


T: Asks 1 to read his or her passage
before the class.


T guides Ss to do
? Ss do groups.
T checks


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework</b> :Write an instructive food


Preare Unit 3 (Read)


<b>*Comment:...</b>
<b>*KÝ duyệt của chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning : 22 / 9 / 2010.
Date of teaching :


Period :15


<b>Unit 3: at home</b>




<b>Lesson 4 : Read</b>
<b>A.Objective </b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the safe precautions in
the house


<b>*language content:</b>
 vacabs:


 grammar:
<b>*Teaching aids : </b>


• <i><b>Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, stereo </b></i>


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>


<b>Contents</b> <b>Activites </b>


<b>A.Warm up : </b>


Chatting


<b> </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

<b> </b>


<b> </b>
<b> </b>


Do you think our kitchen is a dangerous


or safe place ?


Ex: some cards


Chemicals, drug, kitchen, matches,
candy, fruit, electricity, scissors, knife,
cushion, magazines,


<b>B.New lesson </b>


<i>I. Pr-reading</i>


<i><b>a, Vocabulary</b></i>


- precautions(n) sự đề phòng
- chemicals (n) hoá chất
- injure (v) làm bị thơng
- destroy (v) phá huỷ
- Cause (v) nguyên nhân
- Electrical socket (n) ổ điện
- Cover ( v) bao phủ
- Safe (a.) An toàn


- Bead (n) Hạt , vật tròn
- Scissor (n) C¸i kÐo


Eg: It only takes one match to
cause a fire.


<i><b>b, True /false prediction </b></i>



1.It is safe to leave medicine around the
house


2.Drugs can look like candy


3.A kitchen is a suitable place to play
4.Playing with one match can’t start a
fire


5.Putting a knife into an electrical socket


T gives a question for Ss to discuss


T uses some cards and asks to find out
which things are safe with children or
not.


Ss: work in two groups


Safe dangerous
-which group finish earlier is winner


T Introduces the topics and gives new
<i>words ( In our family , there are many</i>


<i>diffirent objects. Some of them may be</i>
<i>dangerous to children if we don t keep</i>’


<i>them. Now you workin pairs to make a</i>


<i>list of dangerous things and discuss :</i>
<i>what must we do to eep children safe?</i>


Ss: discuss in pairs


Ss: Listen- repeat- make similar sentences
then copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

is dangerous


6.Young children don’t understand that
many household objects are dangerous.


<i>II.White- reading</i>


<i><b>a) Correct T/F</b></i>


<i>1. F( It is safe to keep medicine in</i>


<i>locked cupboard)</i>


2. T


<i>3. F (A kitchen is a dangerous place)</i>
<i>4. F ( a match can start a fire)</i>


5. T
6. T


<i><b>b) Answer the Qs on page 32</b></i>



a. Because children may drink or eat
these things.


b. Because the kitchen is a dangerous
place


c. Because matches can start a fire
d. Because children can put Sth into


electrical sockets.


e. Because they can injure or kill
children.


<i><b> III.Post- reading</b></i>


<b>Match A and B</b>

<b> A</b>



1. Where shall we put the airmchairs?
2. Why must we not let children play in


the kitchen?


3. Why do we have to make sure
children don’t play with matches?
4. Why must we put all chemicals and


drugs in cupboards?



5. Why must we cover electrical
sockets?


6. What do dangerous objects include?
Key :


1. d 4. a
2. c 5. b
3. c 6. e


Ss read the text silently then compare the
answers with the others


T gives correct answers
Ss copy correct answers


Ss read the text silently again and answer
the Qs


T gives the correct answers


<b>B</b>



7. because children often drink or eat
those things


8. So that children don’t try to put
anything into them



9. Because fire destroys home and
injures children when they play with
matches.


10. In the living room


11. Scissors, knives and small objects


T guides Ss to do.
Ss work in groups
Ss do the Ex in groups


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

<i>quickly and correctly is the winner )</i>


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework</b> :Learn all vacabs & ro all Ex


Prepare Unit 3 ( Write)


*<b>Comment:...</b>
<b>*Kí duyệt của chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning : 24 / 09 / 2010
Date of teaching :


Period :16


<b>Unit 3: at home</b>



<b> Lesson 5 :Write</b>



<b>* Objective: </b>


<i><b> By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a description of a room in the house</b></i>
<b>* Teaching aids :</b>


<i><b>Ss’ books, clear papers, pictures, cards </b></i>
<b>*Teaching procedure</b>


<b>Contents</b> <b>Activites </b>


<b>A.Warm up</b>


Chatting


Eg: - Is your house big or small?
- Is it nice?


- How many rooms are there in
your house?


- Can you describe a room in your
house?


<b>B.New lesson </b>
<b>I. Pre-writing.</b>


<i><b>a)Vocabulary</b></i>


- Wardrobe (n) tủ quần áo


- folder (n) kẹp tài liệu
- lighting fixture (n) đèn chùm
- Beneath (prep) ở bên dới
- Tower rack (n) giá treo khăn
<i><b>b)Rub out and remember</b></i>


<i><b>c)Read the description of Hoa s room</b></i>’
1.What is there on the left of the room ?


T aks Ss some questions
Ss answer the qs


T asks Ss to read informations in the form
paragraph and teacher explains some new
words.


Ss: copy and repeat


T asks sts to read the description of Hoa’s
room then ask sts some qs


Ss answer


T asks Ss to describe the position of things
in Hoa’s kitchen


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

2.Where is the bookshelf ?


3.What is there on the right side of the
room ?



4.Where is the wordrode ?


+Let Ss describe the position of
things in the kitchen


<b>II.White- Writing</b>


<i><b>* Describe Hoa s kitchen base on the</b></i>’
<i><b>paragraph about Hoa s room</b></i>’ :


<i>-This is Hoa s kitchen.</i>’


<i> -There is a refrigerator in the right</i>
<i>corner of the room. </i>


<i>-Next to the refrigerator is the stove and</i>
<i>oven. </i>


<i>-On the other side of the oven there is a</i>
<i>sink and next to the sink is a towel rack .</i>
<i>-The dish rack is on the counter to the</i>
<i>right of the window and the beneath the</i>
<i>selves .</i>


<i>-On the shelves and on the counter</i>
<i>beneath the window , there are jars of</i>
<i>sugar , flour and tea .</i>


<i>-In the middle of the kitchen there are a</i>


<i>table and four chairs .</i>


<i>-The lighting fixture is above the table ,</i>
<i>and beneath the lighting fixture is a vase</i>
<i>with flowers .</i>


<b>III.Post-Writing.</b>


1.Reading your writing.


<i><b>2.Write a description of a room in your</b></i>


<i><b>house , refer to the form paragraph</b></i>


T: I want to know the position of the shelf
Ss: The shelf is above the table, it is
opposite the wardrobe


T: and where is the desk?
Ss: It is on the left of the room


Ss do the ex in their notebooks
individually


T asks Ss to work in pairs to check the
answer


T: After Ss finish , T asks some Ss to read
the passage in front of the class.



T guides for Ss how to do the ex
Ss copy and write


T asks some Ss to read their writing in
front of the class.


T corrects mistakes


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework</b>: write a similar description


Do Ex 7


*<b>Comment:...</b>
<b>*KÝ duyÖt của chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning : 25 / 09 / 2010
Date of teaching :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

<b>Unit 3: at home</b>



<b>Lesson 6 :Language focus</b>


<i>* </i><b>Objective:</b>


By the end of the lesson , students will be able to practice further about must,
have to...


<b>*language content</b>: Reflexive pronouns



Modals: must, have, ought to.
<b>*Teaching aids : </b>


• <i>Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards... </i>


<b>*Teaching procedure</b>


<b>Contents</b> <b>Activites </b>


<b>A.Warm up</b>


Macthing these verbs with pictures


feed empty tidy


sweep clean dust


<b>B. New lesson</b>


<i><b>1. Presentation</b></i>
<i><b>*Structures</b></i>


<i><b>a, Model verbs: must/ought to</b></i>
Ex:


- You must obey your parents
- We must try to help poor children
- You mustn’t make noise in class
Ex:



- I can’t meet you now. I have to work


<i><b>-Must: diễn tả sự bắt buộc xuất ph¸t tõ</b></i>


<i>ngời nói , từ những tình cảm và mong</i>
<i>muốn do ngời nói đề xuất.</i>


<b>-Mustn t</b><i>’ :diƠn t¶ sự cấm đoán</i>


<i>khụng c phép làm gì</i>


Form:


must/mustn’t


S + have/has to + V-bare
ought to


<i><b>b, Have to: DiÔn tả sự bắt buéc do</b></i>


<i>ngoại cảnh đa đến chứ ngời nói không</i>
<i>cảm thấy mong muốn nh vậy.</i>


Form:
Note:


- Dùng must để nói về hiện tại và TL
- Dùng have với all form


T guides Ss to do.


Ss work in groups.
T checks


T gives some examples then ask sts some
qs to check sts’ understanding


<i>-Is (you) S ?</i>


<i>-Is (must) a modal verb ?</i>
<i>-Is (obey) V-bare or V-inf ?</i>


<i>-How can we make form of the negative</i>
<i>form ?</i>


<i>-When do we use Have to/ must / ought</i>
<i>to ?</i>


T asks Ss to give the form , the meaning
and then make similar sentences


Ss: Listen- repeat- make similar sentences
then copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

<b>c,Reflexive ponouns:</b>


(myself,herself,himself, themselves…)
- By + RF = alone = on one’s own
ex:


- He lives by himself in that large house.


:


<i>Ta sử dụng RF khi chủ ngữ và tân ngữ</i>
<i>đồng nhất nhằm nhấn mạnh vào S hoc</i>
<i>O.</i>


<i>-Sau giới từ chỉ nơi chốn không dùng </i>
<i> RF.</i>
<i>-Sau giíi tõ ®i kÌm víi §T dïng RF</i>


Ex: believe in, take care of, look after,
look at...


Ex: She always believes in herself
<i><b>II. Practice</b></i>


<i><b>Exercise 1: </b></i>


<i><b>-Complete the dialogue</b></i>
a. must/have to tidy
b. have to/must tidy
c. must/ have to sweep
d. must/have to clean
e. must empty


f. must / have to feed
Exercise 2:


a)S1: I failed my English test
S2: You ought to study harder


b) You ought to get up early


c) You ought to eat more vegetables
d) You ought to see the dentist.
Exercise 3:


<i><b>Complete the dialogue ( P.36)</b></i>
1. ourselves


2. myself
3. youself
4. himself
5. herself
6. themselves
7. yourselves
<i><b>III.Production</b></i>


Lucky number


T gives sts examples then let sts say out
the usage


Ss say the usage
T gives some note
Ss write down


Sslook at the pictures and work in pairs to
complete the dialogues


T calls on some pairs to practise then


teacher corrects the mistakes


Let sts do exercise in pairs
T calls some pairs to check


Ss work in pairs to complete the dialogues
then practice.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

<b>1</b> <b>2</b> <b>3</b> <b>4</b> <b>5</b>


1.We ought to doing home work before
going to class.( T or F)


2.Make sentence with “ have to”.


3.I himself cut my leg.(correct mistake)
4.Lucky number.


5.I’m hungry.What must I do?


T guides for Ss how to do ex
Ss work in groups


T checks


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework</b>: learn all grammar & redo exs.


Each grammar gives 2 exampls



*<b>Comment:...</b>
<b>*KÝ dut cđa chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning : 20 / 09 / 2010
Date of teaching :


Period : 18


<b>Revision</b>



<i><b>* Objectives:</b></i>


<i><b> By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to review tenses and vocabulary</b></i>
learnt in the first semester


* language contet.


<i>*Teaching aids : Ss books, small boards.</i>’


<i> *Teaching procedure</i>


<b>Contents</b> <b>Activites</b>


<b>A.Warm-up.</b>


<i> Give out the verbs.</i>


G1 G2
Sweep Read
Tidy Cook


Watch TV


<b>B.New lesson.</b>


<i><b>I.Presentation.</b></i>


<i><b>1.Present simple tense</b></i>
Ex:Water boils at 100 o<sub>C</sub>
<i><b>Form : S + V (s,es) . . . </b></i>


S + don’t/doesn’t + V-inf . . .
Do/Does + S V-inf . . . . ?


*The usage : diễn tả chân lý luôn đúng, sự


Tguides Ss to do.
Ss work in group.
T checks.


T asks Ss to gives exs then retell form,
usage.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

thËt hiÓn nhiªn
2.Structure : Adj + enough + V-inf


Ex : I am lucky enough to have alot of friends
3.To be going to + V-inf . . .


 Chỉ dự định tơng lai .
Ex : She is going to see a movie .



*Cách dùng các trạng tõ chØ n¬i chèn :
inside , outside . . .


4.Model verbs:


must, have to , ought to + V-inf
5. Reflexive pronouns: myself, himself,


herself, itself, themselves, yourself ( ves),
ourselves


<i><b>II.Practice </b></i>


Ex1.Choose the best answer


1.I am going... the movie at 8 this evening
a.see b. seeing
c. to seeing d. to see
2.He isnot strong enough... a good
basketball player


a. been b. to be
c. being d. be


3. Let’s ...together outside in their
garden of the club


a. us meet b. them meet
c. the children d. meet



4.Would you like ... her a message?
a.leave b. to leave
c. leaving d. left


<b>2. Complete the sentences use reflexive</b>
<b> pronoun</b>


1.What is Nam doing at the moment?
He is doing the housework by ...
2. She can’t carry the table ... so we


need to help her


3. They have to cook dinner... l
4. You should go to the market ... and


buy some fish.


<b>3.Combine</b>


A


1. Why must we cover the elcetrical
sockets?


2. Why did Lan get good grades?


T guides Ss to do
Ss work in pairs


T checks.


1.d 2.b
3.d 4.b


T guides Ss to do
Ss work in pairs
T checks.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

3. Why can Mr Quang speak English so
quickly?


4. Why couldn’t Hai answer all the
questions?


B.


a. Because some of them were too hard
b. Because he practises English all the time
c. Because she worked very hard for the


exams.


d. Because it is a dangerous place
e. Because elecitricity can kill.


<b>4.Answer the questions about you</b>


1.What are you going to do on Sunday?
...


...


1. What do you have to do at home ?


...
...


3.Why do you have to study hard ?


...
...


4.Why does Miss Nga want to be a teacher ?
<i><b>III.Production.</b></i>


Write them in ex book.


T guides Ss to do
Ss work in groups
T checks.


1+e 2+c
3+b 4+a


T guides Ss to do
Ss work in pairs
T checks.


<b>*summary:</b> T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<b>*Homework :</b>Redo exs.



Revive from Unit 1 to Unit 3 for the first writen test


*<b>Comment:...</b>
<b>*KÝ dut cđa chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 19


<b>The first Written Test</b>



<b>A.Objectivies</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

 Language focus : circle the best answer to complete the sentences .


<b>B.Ma TrËn</b>


Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng


TN TL TN TL TN TL


1. Listening 5


2,5 5 2,5


II. Reading 5


2,5 5 2,5



III.Writing 5


2,5
5
2,5
IV.Language


focus 10 2,5 10 2,5


<b>Tæng</b> <b>10</b>


<b> 2,5</b> <b>10 5,0</b> <b>5 2,5</b> <b>25 10</b>
<b>C/Content </b>


<b>I.Listening</b>


*Listen to the dialogue then circle the best answer in A,B,or C to complete the
sentences .


1.He has . . . friends .


A.2 or 3 B. 20 or 30 C. 10 or 12
2.His friends are . . . . . . .


A. Bob and Tom B. Tom and John C.John and Bob
3. Her friend is . . .


A. New B. nice C. cold
4. He is her . . .



A. friend B. cousin C. neighbor
5. Her new friend is . . .


A. outgoing B.sociable C. both A and B are corre


<b>II.Reading</b>


*Read the text below and decide whether the following sentences are
True ( T ) or False ( F )


He is Steve .He is 25 years old . He is going to look for a new job and a new flat
next month . He is going to look in the newspapers and ask all his friends for help .
He’d like to move to a quieter town because he can’t stand the noise . He is going to
stay where he is this time next year – He know that .


T F


1.Steve is living in a noisy town
2.He is not going to change his job
3.He thinks that his friends will help him


4.He is going to live in another town this time next year
5.He is twenty years old


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

*Choose the best option (A , B or C ) to complete each of the following sentences
1.Would you . . . to go to the movies with me ? –I’d love to


A. mind B.want C. like
2.Can I speak . . . Mary , please ?



A. to B. from C.with
3.He is not . . . get married .


A.enough old to B. enough old for C. old enough to
4.They enjoy . . . .jokes .


A.to tell B. tell C. telling
5.The Amazon River . . . in to the Atlantic Ocean .


A.flow B. flows C. flowed
6Alexander Graham Bell was born . . . . March 3, 1847 .


A.on B. In C. at
7.Would you like . . . a message ?


A.to leave B. leave C. leaving
8.We ought . . . the wardrobe in the corner opposite the bed


A.put B. to put C. push
9.The children are old enough to look after . . . .


A.themselves B. ourselves C. herself
10.Let’s meet . . . .. the cinema .


A.out B. outside C. outside in


<b>III.Writing.</b>


Write a paragraph about your friend.



( name / age / apearance / characters / address / ….)


.
………


.
………


.
………


.
………


.
………


<i><b>The end</b></i>

<b>Key :</b>



<b>I . Listening </b>


Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm


1. C 2.A 3.B 4.B 5.C

<b>Tapecripts</b>



1.Woman : How many friends do you have ?
Man : Well , about a dozen .



2.Woman : Are Tom , Bob and John your friends ?
<b> </b>Man : No . Only the first two are my friensds
3. Man : What is your new friend like ?


Woman : Well , she is a nice tall girl .
4. Man : Lam is your friend , isn’t he ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

Woman : Oh, no . He often goes to parties and likes to be with friends

<b>II.Reading </b>



<i>Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm</i>
1.F 2.F 3.T 4.T 5.F
III.Language focus


Tổng số 5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm
1.C 2.A 3.C 4.C 5.B
6.B 7.A 8.B 9.A 10.B


<i><b>IV.Writing</b></i>


<i>Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi cõu ỳng 0,5 im</i>


*<b>Comment:...</b>
<b>*Kí duyệt của chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning :
Date of teraching :
Period 20


<b>Correcting the first test</b>




<b>A.objectives</b>


 After correcting students can find out their mistakes & review the knowldge
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>


<b>I.Listening</b>


1. C 2.A 3.B 4.B 5.C
<b>II.Reading</b>


<i><b> *Read the text below and decide whether the following sentences are </b></i>
<i><b> True ( T ) or False ( F )</b></i>


He is Steve .He is 25 years old . He is going to look for a new job and a new flat
next month . He is going to look in the newspapers and ask all his friends for help .
He’d like to move to a quieter town because he can’t stand the noise . He is going to
stay where he is this time next year – He know that .


T F


F 1.Steve is living in a noisy town
F 2.He is not going to change his job
T 3.He thinks that his friends will help him


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

F 5.He is twenty years old


<b>III.Language focus </b>


<i><b>*Choose the best option (A , B or C ) to complete each of the following sentences .</b></i>



1.Would you . . . to go to the movies with me ? –I’d love to


<b> C.like </b>


2.Can I speak . . . Mary , please ?
A. to


3.He is not . . . get married .
C. old enough to


4.They enjoy . . . .jokes .
<b> C. telling </b>


5.The Amazon River . . . in to the Atlantic Ocean .
B. flows


6.Alexander Graham Bell was born . . . . March 3, 1847 .
A.on


7.Would you like . . . a message ?
A .to leave


8.We ought . . . the wardrobe in the corner opposite the bed
B. to put


9.The children are old enough to look after . . . .
A.themselves


10.Let’s meet . . . .. the cinema .


B. outside


<b>IV.Writing.</b>


Ss write on the board
Others correct the mistakes
T checks


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<i><b>* Homework : </b></i>+ Redo the test.


+Prepare unit 4 :Getting started + Listen and read


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period : 21


<b>Unit 4 : Our past</b>



<b>Lesson 1: Getting started </b>–<b> listen and read</b>


*<b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to know Nga’s grandparents . They used
to


do in the past


<b>*Teaching contents</b>



<i>1.Vocabulary:(n) equipment, festival, folktale, light</i>


<i> 2. Grammar: Used to </i>


<b>*Teaching aids</b>


- Stereo , Pictures, cards, extraboard


*<b>Teaching procedure</b>


<b>Contents</b> <b>Activites</b>


<b>A/Warm up</b>


<i><b>* Getting started</b></i>
Answer:


- Tv
- radio


- mobile phone
- lighting fixture
- morden clothing
- uniform …


<b>BNew lesson </b>
<b>1.Presentation</b>


T divides Ss into two groups. Asks Ss
to look at the picture and write the


names of the things that don’t belong
to the past


Ss: work in two groups


<i>T: “Today we will learn about life in</i>


<i>VN 100 years ago . We will know</i>
<i>what our grandparents used to do,</i>
<i>how their life was like.Firstly , make</i>
<i>a list of the things that do not belong</i>
<i>to the past in VN”</i>


Ss: Make a list in groups


<i>T Can you guess what children of</i>


<i>your age had to do 100 years ago?</i>


<i>Ss: guess ( cook meals, feed</i>


<i>chickens-pigs, clean the house, wash</i>
<i>the clothes...)</i>


<i>T: “We are going to listen to a</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

<i><b>a)Vocabularies</b></i>


Great grandma(n) bµ



Equipment (n) trang thiÕt bÞ
light – lit (v) thắp sáng
folktale (n) trun d©n gian
traditional(a)thc vÒ truyÒn thèng
Look after (v) chăm sóc


Used to (v) đã từng


+ I used to look after my younger
brothers & sisters


<i><b>b)Grammar</b></i>


<i>- Used to + V : đã thờng làm</i>


<i>trong quá khứ mà nay không</i>
<i>làm nữa</i>


- What was life like then? Cuộc
sống ngày đó nh thế nào


- Had to: đã phải làm gì trong quá
khứ


<b>II. Practice</b>


<i><b>a)Practice the dialogue</b></i>


<i><b>b)Ask and answer the questions.</b></i>
1. She used to live on a farm



2. Because she had to stay home and
help her mom


3. She used to cook the meals , clean the
house and wash the clothes


4. Her grandmother used to light the
lamb and her great grandfather ued to
tell them stories


5. She asked her grandmother to tell her
the tale” the lost shoe”


<i><b>c) Fact or opinion ?</b></i>


<b>Fact: I learn English</b>
<b>Opinion: English is easy</b>


a. Fact
b. fact
c. fact
d. fact
e. opinion
f. opinion


<i>Nga s grandmother used to do when</i>’


<i>she was a young girl .</i>”



Ss: listen to the tape once and
underline the new words or
structures


T explains


Ss copy and repeat


Ss practice the dialogue in pairs.
Then 1 or 2 pairs practice the
dialogue before the class.


Ss:answer the Qs on page 39
T: give the correct answers


T: explains what do “Fact &
Opinion” mean


+Let sts read silently the dialogue
again then find out the answer


Ss: work in pairs
+Correct sts’ mistakes


T: give some verbs( eat too much
candy, cry all day...)


Ss: practice in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

<b>III.Production</b>



*Ask and answer with
“ Did you used to...?
S1: Did you use to get up late?
S2: yes , I did


S3: No. I used to get up early


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
<i><b>* Homework : </b></i>+ Redo all exs


+Learn vacabs & read the dialogue


*<b>Comment:...</b>
<b>*Kí duyệt của chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period :22


<b>Unit 4 : Our past</b>



<b>Lesson 2 : speak & Listen</b>


<b>*Objective</b>


 By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use “ used to “ to talk about the way
thing used to be and they are now.And listen to a folktale and then understand
about foolish and greed…



<b>* Teaching aids :</b>


<i>Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, stereo </i>
* <b>Teaching procedure</b>


<b>Contents</b> <b>Activites</b>


<b>A.Warm up</b>


<i><b>* Happy memories</b></i>


1. What is your favorite childhood
memory?


2. What sports or games did you use
to play when you were younger?
3. Did you use to cry a lot when you


were a small child?


T: ask Ss some Qs
Ss: answer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

<b>B.New lesson </b>


<b>Speak</b>



<b>I.Pre - speaking</b>


<i><b>* Used to:</b></i>



Eg: Where did Nga’s grandma use to
live?


She used to live on a farm
V-inf


<b>II.While - speaking</b>


<i><b>+ Name the things in each picture</b></i>
P1 : small house, paddy field, children
play/stay at home, satck of traw,
traditional clothings ...


P2 : big houses and buildings, car,
shops, Tv, traffic lights, morden
clothings...


Ex:


- They used to live in small houses .
Now they live in big houses and
buildings


- They used to walk but now they go
by cars or motobikes.


<b>III.Post - speaking</b>


 Write about things you often


did by using “used to”


<i><b>+ Word cue drill</b></i>
ex; live / Hue / ha Noi
I used to live in Ha Noi


1. have / long hair / short hair
2. get up / late / early


3. walk to school / bike
4. be fat / be thin


Ex: Last year I used to get up late,
Now I often get up early...


<b> Listen</b>



<b>I..Pre - listening</b>


Do you always read stories?
Which stories impress you most ?
Why?
Which moral lesson do you get from
this story?
<i><b>a)Vocabulary</b></i>


lay eggs - laid(v) đẻ trứng


excitedly (a.) hµo høng phÊn khởi
In amazement (n) trong sự ngạc nhiên


foolish ( a.) > < clever


greedy ( a) tham lam


discover(v) ph¸t hiƯn, kh¸m ph¸
<i><b>b) T/F prediction</b></i>


1. The farmer lived a bad life with
his family .


2. He used to sell eggs to buy food


+Let sts find out “Used to” in the
dialogue then write examples on the
board


Ss: tell the form and the usage of “
used to”. Then make sentences


Eg: I used to study badly


T asks Ss to name the things in two
pictures


+Divide sts in to 2 groups to name
things in 2 pictures


Ss: work in 2 groups


+Let sts talk about the way things used


to be and the way they are now


Ss practice in pairs .


T calls on some pairs then correct sts’
pronunciation


+Let sts make sentences with “Used
to”


-Sts work in pairs to do the cue
T checks


Ss work individually . then 1 or two Ss
speak in front of the class.


T aks Ss some qs
Ss answer the Qs
T takes notes on board


+T gives sts some vocabs


+Let sts read in choral and individual
Ss: listen and repeat new words


+T gives T/F prediction have sts to
read the prediction and guess which T
or F


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

and clothes .



3. His wife discovered a gold egg .
4. His wife is very greedy and


wanted more eggs


5. The farmer is foolish . He
dicided to cut open all the
chickens and find more gold
eggs .


<b>II .While </b>–<b> listening</b>


<i><b>a) Check T/F statements</b></i>


<i>You think</i>


1
2
3
4
5


<i>You hear</i>


<i><b>F</b></i>
<i><b>T</b></i>
<i><b>F</b></i>
<i><b>T</b></i>
<i><b>T</b></i>



<i><b>c) Answer the questions</b></i>


- Did the chicken lay a gold egg ?
- Who did a gold egg discover ?


<i><b>b) Listen and choose the most</b></i>
<i><b>suitable moral lesson</b></i>


Key:


a. Don’t be foolish and greedy


<b>III.Post - listening</b>


<i><b>* Gap </b></i>–<i><b> filling</b></i>


a. The chicken laid many eggs
b. The farmer used to buy foods
c. He went to collect the eggs
d. Her husband dicided to cut
open all the chickens and find
more eggs


e. The foolish farmer and his
greedy wife .


and check after reading


+Let sts read the tittle



<i>T: “ There are a lot of Vietnamese</i>


<i>folktales which have precious moral</i>
<i>lessons. We are going to listen to one</i>
<i>of those stories” . You listen to it and</i>


decide which of the following is the
most suitable moral lesson


Ss: listen to the tape three times. Then
change to the partner to compare the
answer


T asks Ss to listen to the tape 2 times
again to check.


Ss: listen


+Let sts correct T/F statements
+Have sts answer the questions


+Let sts say out the main of the story
-Sts give the answer


T checks


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .


* <b>Homework :</b> + Write a paragraph about what you often did or not when you


were smal


+Learn vacabs & redo all exs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period : 23


<b>Unit 4 : Our past</b>



<b>Lesson 3 : Read</b>


<b>*Objective</b>


By the end of the lesson ,Students will be able to understand more and retell the
story “ The lost shoes”


<b>*Teaching aids</b>


Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, stereo…
*<b>Teaching procedure</b>


<b>Contents</b> <b>Activites</b>


<b>A. Warm up</b>


<i><b>*Brain storming</b></i>


<i><b>The frog price Seven-mile shoes </b></i>



<i> snow white and the 7 dwarps</i>


<b>B.New lesson </b>
<b>I.Pre - reading</b>


<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>
marry (v) kÕt h«n


unfortunately(adv) khơng may
cruel (a) độc ác


upset (a) thÊt väng
die of (v) chÕt v×
excited (a) hµo høng
magically (adv) k× diƯu
change smt into smt ( v)


<i>Eg: The fairy appeared and magically</i>


<i>changed her rags into beautiful clothes .</i>


- fall in love with smb (v)
- own (v) së h÷u, cã
<i><b>b)True /false prediction</b></i>


1. Little Pea’s father is a poor farmer
2. Her father got married again after his


wife died



3. Her new mother was beautiful and
nice to her


4. She worked hard all day


5. She didn’t have new clothes to take


T guides Ss to do.
Ss work in group.
T checks


T Introduces the topics and asks Ss to
retell the story in Vietnamese.


T explains the new words based on
the content of the story


Eg: who appear in the story?
- prince


- fairy


- …


Ss listen- repeat- make similar
sentences then copy


T plays the tape


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

part in the festival.



<b>II.While - reading</b>


<i><b>a)Guiding questions</b></i>


- What did story talk about ?


- How many people are there in the story
- Who is Little Pea ?


- Who is Stout Nut ?


<i><b>b) Checking the predictions</b></i>


Guess answer


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.


T
T
F
T
F


<i><b>c) Complete the sentences with the</b></i>
<i><b>words in the story <p.42></b></i>



Keys:
a. farmer
b. died


c. used…again
d. marry/choose
e. new clothes
f. lost


<b>III.Production</b>


<i><b>* Answer the Qs on page 42</b></i>
Keys:


a. She was a poor farmer’s daughter
b. She made little Pea do the chores all


day


c. Before the festival started , a fairy
appeared and magically changed her
rags into beautiful clothes


d. The prince decided to marry the girl
who fitted the lost shoes


e. This is not a true story because there
is a fairy



+T read the text then have sts read
silently


-Sts read the text then answer the
guiding questions


Ss read the text silently then compare
the answers with the others


T gives correct answers
Ss copy correct answers


+Ask sts to work in pairs , filling the
blanks with suitable words from the
story


-Sts do exercise
+T corrects mistakes


Ss work in groups
T checks


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
* <b>Homework :</b> + Retell the story.


+Learn vacabs & redo all exs


*<b>Comment:...</b>
<b>*Kí duyệt của chuyên môn</b>



Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 24


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b>Lesson 4 : Write</b>


<b>* Objective </b>


<b> By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to write a short imagine story/or use </b>
simple past tense to write a folktale


<b>* languague content:</b>
Vacabs:


Grammar: Past simple.


<b>* Teaching aids :</b>


<i>Ss books, small boards, pictures, cards *</i>’ <i>Teaching procedure</i>


<b>Contents</b> <b>Activites</b>


<i>*Checking the old lesson</i>


- Retell “The lost shoe”
A.Warm up


- Do you want to read imaginary
stories?



- Name some of them.


- Have you ever read the story “
How the tigers got stripes?”
- Can you tell me the story?


<i><b>B. New lesson</b><b> </b></i>


<i><b>I Pre- writing</b></i>
<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


escape (v) trốn thoát
graze (v) gặm cỏ
tie (v) trãi buéc


wisdom(n) trÝ kh«n trí nhớ
straw (n) rơm rạ


burn (n) vết bỏng, vết cháy
(v) đốt


<i>*Checking vocabs </i>
What & where
<i><b>b) Complete the story.</b></i>
Keys:


1. appeared 5.went
2. was 6.tied
3. said 7.lit
4. left 8.burned


9.escaped
<i><b>c) Answer the questions </b></i>


1. Where was the man ?


2. What the buffalo do when the tiger
appeared ?


3. What did the tiger want to know ?
4. What did he do before going home
? why ?


5. What did he do when he return ?
II.While- writing


<i><b>*Imagine you are the farmer . Use the</b></i>
<i><b>words to write the story</b></i>


The man


Ss: 1 Student tells the story
T aks Ss some questions
Ss answer the qs


Ss tell the story in Vietnamese


T asks Ss to read informations in the
form paragraph and teacher explains
some new words by using pictures
Ss copy and repeat



T asks Ss the meanings of the verbs
in the box


Ss do in pairs.


T gives the correct answers


+Let sts read the story again to
answer the questions


-Sts answer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>

The farmer I
He


His my
Key:


One day, as I was in the field and my
buffalo was grazing nearby, a tiger
came.It aked me why the strong buffalo
was my servant and I was its master .I
told the tiger I had the wisdom .The tiger
wanted to see it. I told it I left the
wisdom at home. Then I tied the tiger on
the tree with a rope because I didn’t
want it to eat the buffalo .I went get the
straw and burned the tiger.The tiger
escaped , but it still has black stripers.



<b>III. Post- wrrriting</b>


*Checkig the guiding
<i><b>* Tell the story</b></i>


Team A is a tiger :I
Team B is a buffalo: I


T asks Ss to work in pairs to check
the answer


After Ss finish , T asks some Ss to
read the story in front of the class.
T guides for Ss how to do the ex.
Team A plays the role of tiger, team
B plays the role of buffalo


Ss: work in teams, telling the story
A volunteer from each team tell the
story in front of the class


<b>*summary:</b>T asks Ss to retll the knowledge they’ve just learnt .
* <b>Homework :</b> +Learn vacabs & redo all exs


*<b>Comment:...</b>
*<b>KÝ duyÖt của chuyên môn</b>


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :


Period 25


<b>Lesson 5 : Language focus</b>


<b>A/ Objective</b>


• <i>By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to practice furthur about preps of time,</i>
past simple tense and “used to”


<b>C/ Teaching aids </b>


• <i>Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards... </i>
D/. Teaching procedure


<i>contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’
<i><b>I/ Warm up</b></i>


<i><b>Match A and B</b></i>


A: run, fly, take, go, have, do , be, ride,
eat, sit, come


B: did, flew, had, was, were, rode, came,
ate, went, took, sat


II/New lesson


T: ask Ss to work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

<i><b>1/ Presentation</b></i>


<i><b>a)Past simple tense </b></i>


ex : (+) I was in the field


(-) She didn’t ride a bike to school
(?) Did she ride abike to school ?
-Yes , she did


-No , she didn’t


<i><b> *The usage : to express a past habit or</b></i>


<i>an action happened in the past .</i>


Form


S + V<past> . . .


S + did + not + V-inf . . .
Did + S + V-inf . . . ?
<i><b>b)Prepositions of time: </b></i>


in, at, on, between, after, before


<b>at: time</b>


- at noon : vµo bi tra
- at midnight


- at breakfast/lunch/dinner


- at sunrise/dawn lóc bình minh
- at sunset/dusk lúc hoàng hôn


<b>on: + day</b>


- On Monday/Sunday
- On+ ngày tháng năm


<b>In: tháng hoặc năm không có ngày đi</b>


kèm


- in january/february/2003
<i><b>c)Used to </b></i>


Ex : I used to cook meal


She didn’t use to get up early
Did you use to get up early ?
Form


+ S + used to + V


- S + didn’t + use to + V
? Did + S + use to + V ?
*The usage


<i>- Express a past habit or an action</i>


<i>usually happened in the past.</i>



<i><b>2/Practice</b></i>
<i><b>Exercise2 < P. 44></b></i>


<i><b>* Complete the dialogue </b></i>
Keys:


a. Did you eat...for...?
b. I rode /walked....
c. Where were you...?
d. I had....


+Ask sts to look at the writing and
ask :


<i>-Which tense did they use in the</i>
<i>story ?</i>


T: ask Ss to give the form , the
meaning and then make sentences
Ss: Listen- repeat- make sentences
then copy


Ss: look at the pictures and work in
pairs to completet the dialogues
T: call on some pairs to practise
+Let sts make examples about “used
to”


Ss: tell the form and the usage of “


used to”. Then make sentences


Eg: I used to study badly


Ss: work in pairs to complete the
dialogues then practice.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

<i><b>Exercise 3 (p 44)</b></i>


<i><b>* Complete the sentences </b></i>
a. on


b. in


c. between
d. at - after
e. before


Exercise 4: (P 45)


<i><b>* Complete the dialogue use used to</b></i>“ ”
<i><b>and the verbs in the box .</b></i>


1. used to have
2. used to be
3. used to live
3/Production


<i><b>*Nought (O) and crosses (X)</b></i>



live Help mom Go to


school


smoke Go fishing cry


Listen to


music Fall exam Get up late


+Let sts do exercise
+T corrects mistakes


+Have sts work in pairs to complete
the dialogue then play the role before
the class


+T divide class in to 2 teams let sts
make sentences use “used to”


<i>IV.Homework</i>



- Have a look at Unit 5( getting started- Listen and read
- Ex 5-6


<i>V.Remarks and marks</i>



...
...



<b>Date of planning :</b>
Date of teaching :
Period 26


Unit 5. Study habits


<i>I.</i> <i>Division: 5 lessons</i>
A/<b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:


- Give simple advices, directions and requests
- Write letters


<b>B/Language content</b>


<i>1. Vocabulary: <v> highlight , spell , underline</i>


<n> behavior , comment , co-operation , participation , fair
<a.> pround (of) , satisfactory


2. Grammar:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

- Model verbs: should...


- Commands, requests and advice in reported speech
<b>C/ Teaching aids</b>


- Stereo ,Pictures, cards , Small board



D/Teaching Procedure


Lesson 1


Getting started – listen and read


<i>Teachingcontents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’
<i><b>I/Warm up</b></i>


<i><b> Play network: </b></i>


physics English


Literature


<i><b>II/Checking the old lesson</b></i>


Write sentences with “ used to”
<i><b>III/New lesson </b></i>


<i>1/Presentation</i>


<i><b>a, Vocabulary</b></i>


- Report card (n) phiÕu ®iĨm
- Excellent (a) xt s¾c


- be proudof Smb/sth <a.> tù hµo
- improve (v) trau rồi , cải thiện
- pronunciation (n) phát âm



- Try ones best to do Sth cè g¾ng
<i><b>b,Checking vocabs</b></i>


-Rub out and remember
<i><b>c) T/F prediction</b></i>


1. Tim was out when his mother called
him


2. Tim’s mother met his teacher at
school


3. Tim’s report is poor


4. Tim needs to improve his Spanish
grammar


5. Tim promised to try his best in
learning Spanish.


<i>2/ Practice</i>


T: divide Ss into two groups.
Ss: play in two groups


T: ask some Qs


<i>- How many subjects do you</i>



<i>have a week?</i>


<i>- What are they?</i>


<i>- What subjects do you like</i>


<i>best?</i>


<i>- How often do you have that</i>


<i>subject?</i>


Ss: answer the qs
T: take notes on board


+Call 2 sts


+Give feedback and marks


T: We are going to listen to a
dialogue between Jim and his
mother about the school report
Ss: listen to the tape once and
underline the new words or
structures


T: explain


Ss: copy and repeat



+T let sts guess T/F prediction then
write sts’ guessing on the board ,
check after reading


Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs.
subjects at


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

<i><b>a)Practice the dialogue</b></i>


QS: Who is Jim? Is Jim a good student?
What were Jim and his mother talking
about?


<i><b>b)Check T/F prediction</b></i>


1. F - > Tim was in the livingroom
2. T


3. F - > His report is excellent
4. F - > He needs to improve. . .
5. T


<i><b>c)Answer the questions<p.47></b></i>
a. Miss Johnson is Jim’s mom


b. Mrs Jackson gave Jim’s mother his
report card


c. Jim studied very well this semester
d. Miss Jackson said Jim should work



harder on his Spanish pronunciation
e. She gave him a dictionary


<i><b>3/.Production</b></i>


<i><b>*Take a survey :</b></i>


-What subjects do you needs to improve
Name What subjects ...?
Yen


Ha EnglishMath...


Ex : Yen said she needed to improve
English


Then 1 or 2 pairs practice the
dialogue before the class.


Ss: work individually to do the task.
Then compare with their partner
+Let sts check T/F statements


Ss: answer the Qs on page 47
T: give the correct answers


+Ask sts to go around then ask their
friends and write the names , the
subjects that their friends need to
improve



+Call some sts to report about their
friends


IV.Homework.



- Learn by heart new words
- Ex 1,2


<i><b>V.Remarks and marks</b></i>



...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 27


<i><b>Lesson 2 : Speak & Listen</b></i>


<i><b>A/ Objectives:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

<b>B/ Teaching aids : </b>


• <i><b>Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, ... </b></i>


C/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacherand Students activites </i>’



<i>I/Warm up</i>


<i><b>*Shark attack</b></i>


- S U B J E C T S (8)


iI/Checking the old lesson


Read and translate “listen and read “
into Vietnamese


<i><b>III/New lesson </b></i>
<b> Speak</b>


<i><b>1.Pre – speaking </b></i>



<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


<i>-Civic education <n> GDCD</i>


-Physical education <n> TD


-Technology <n> c«ng nhgƯ
<i><b>b)Answer the questions</b></i>


1.When do you do your homework ?
2.Who help you with your homework ?
3.How much time do you spend on these
subjects .math ...?



4.Which subjecs do you need to improve
?


5.What do you do to improve your E ?

<i><b>2/While – speaking </b></i>


<i><b>*Take a survey</b></i>


<i><b>Nam</b></i>


<i><b>e</b></i> <i><b>when</b></i> <i><b>who</b></i> <i><b>how</b></i>


<i><b>which</b></i>
Lan After


dinner My brother 1 hour biology
Thu ...


Ex : Lan said she did homework after
dinner


...


<i><b>3/.Post – speaking</b></i>



<i><b>*Change in to reported speech </b></i>


1. I do my home work after dinner
2. Lan speak E fluently


3. They need to improve their


listening


ss: 1 –2 Ss do the task
+T corrects and give marks


T: explain some new words
Ss: copy and repeat


+T asks sts to look at the questions in
the board and answer the questions
about sts’ information


-Sts work in pairs


+Let sts ask at least 5 friends to
complete the survey <5’>


+Let sts report about their
friends’activities then ask sts some
questions


-Is verbs in the past or present ?
+Call sts to check


+Divide class in to 2 teams


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

4. Hoa improves her E by doing
grammar exercises . . .


<b> Listen</b>


<i><b>1/Pre - Listening</b></i>
<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


-Behavior (n) t cách đạo đức
-Participant (n) ngời tham gia
-Participation (n) sự tham gia


-Miss (v) =absent vắng mặt
-Behavior participation (n) hành vi cử
chỉ đạo đức


-Co-operation (n)sự hợp tác
-Satisfactory <a.> đạt


- Encourage smb to +V: khuyến
khích động viên ai


<i><b>b)Prediction</b></i>
1. Day present
2. day absent


3. Behavior participant
4. Listening


5. Speaking
6. Reading
7. Writing


2/While – listening



<i><b> a) Listen and check the prediction</b></i>
Keys:


<b>1. 87 days present</b>
<b>2. 5 days absent</b>
<b>3. Participation: S</b>
<b>4. Listening: C</b>
<b>5. Speaking : A</b>
<b>6. Reading: A</b>
<b>7. Writing: B</b>


<i><b>b)Comprehension questions</b></i>
1. Who are Nga’s parents ?
2. What’s Nga’s teacher name ?
3. What subjects was reported ?
4. What are the comemnts ?
5. What does S stand for ?
6. Is Nga a good student ?


<i><b>3/.Post – listening </b></i>



<i><b>*Complete a new report about their</b></i>
<i><b>result of last school year</b></i>


T: explain the new words
Ss: listen-copy and then repeat


Ss: listen and repeat new words


+Ask sts to look at Nga’s report and


predict the missing information and
then compare with their partner


<i>T: This is Nga s school report. You</i>’


<i>will hear the conversation between</i>
<i>Miss Lien( Nga s teacher) and Mr</i>’


<i>Lam and Mrs Lien about Nga s first</i>’


<i>term results .</i>


Ss: listen to the tape three times.
Then fill in the report


Ss: compare the answers with their
partners.


T: Ask Ss to listen to the tape 2 times
again to check.


Ss: listen


Ss: make new report card about
themselves , then read aloud


IV

.Homework

.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

- Write a paragraph about you by using the survey
<i>II.</i> <i>V.</i> <i>Remarks and marks</i>



...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 28


<b>Lesson 3 : Read</b>


<b>A/ Objectives</b>



 By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know how other ss learn new
words


<b>B/ Teaching aids </b>


• <i><b>Studnets’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, stereo... </b></i>


C/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’
<i><b>I/ Checking the old lesson</b></i>


- Tell the last shool year result


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Chatting:</b></i>



1. Do you like learning English?


2. How many words do you try to learn
a day?


3. What do you often do to learn new
words?


<i>III/New lesson </i>


<i><b>1/ Presentation</b></i>


<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- Make a list (v) liệt kê
- Mother tongue (n) tiếng mẹ đẻ
- In the right way (n)


- Instead of


- Underline (v) gạch chân
- Highlight (v) lµm nỉi bËt
- Revise (v) «n tËp
- Stick <v> gi¸n
- Come across <v> gặp phải
<i><b>b)Checking vocabs: What & where</b></i>
<i><b>c) True /false prediction</b></i>


a. all language learners write the
meaning of the new words in their
mother tongue



- 1 student does the task
Ss: answer the Qs


T: take notes on board


T: Introduce the topics


T: explain the new words based on
the text


Ss: Listen- repeat- make similar
sentences then copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

b. Some learners write examples of
words they want to learn


c. Every learner tries to learn all the
new words they come across.


d. Many learners only learn new words
that are important.


<i><b>2/.Practice</b></i>



<i><b>a) Read the story again and then</b></i>
<i><b>correct false statements</b></i>


<i>statements</i> <i>guess</i> <i>check</i>



A
B
C
D


<b>F</b>
<b>T</b>
<b>F</b>
<b>T</b>


<i><b>b) Answer the Qs ( P.50)</b></i>
Keys:


a. No, learners learn words in different
ways


b. Such sentences help them remember
the use of new words


c. To remember words better , learners
write examples , put the words and
their meaning on sticks, underline or
highlight them.


d. They may think they can’t do so.
Instead they learn only important
words.


e. Revision is nesessary in learning
words



f. Learners should try different ways of
learning words to find out what is
best.


3/.Production


<i><b> a) Ways languge learners learn new</b></i>
<i><b>words</b></i>


a) made a list and put into it the
meaning of new words in their
mother tongue, learn by heart
b) write one or two examples


with each new words


c) write each word and its use on
the small piesce of paper and
stick it somewhere in their
house


d) underline or highlight only the
words they want to learn


<i><b>b) Take a survey</b></i>
c)


How do you learn new Thu Vui



Ss: read the text silently then
compare the answers with the others
T: give correct answers


Ss: copy correct answers


+Ask sts to work in pairs to answer
the questions


-Sts work in pairs


+Call some pairs to answer then
write the answer on the boarb


-Sts copy down


Ss: read the text and give the ways
language learners learn new words in
pairs


+T gives some notes on the board


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

words ?


a)Made a list and put into
it the meaning of new
words, learn by heart
b)Write one or two
examples with each new
words



c)Stick newwords some
where in the house .


d)Underline or highlight
the words


x


x


Ex: Thu mades a list and put into it the
meaning of new words, learn by heart


+Call some sts to report about their
friends


IV.Homework



- Learn by heart new words


- Way of learning new words that you think is the best or you


<i>V.Remarks and marks</i>



...
...
.


Date of planning :


Date of teaching :
Period 29


<b>Lesson 4 : Write</b>


<i><b>A/Objective</b></i>


<b> By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to write friendly letters</b>


<b>B/ Teaching aids </b>


• <i><b>Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, letters </b></i>

<b>C/ Teahing procedure</b>



<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’
<i><b>I/ Checking the old lesson</b></i>


- the ways of learning English
II/Warm up


<i><b>*Chatting</b></i>


<i>-What is this ? (show a letter )</i>


<i>-Have you ever written to someone?</i>
<i>-To whom do you usually write?</i>
<i>-What do you often write about?</i>


<i><b>II/ New lesson </b></i>



<i><b>1/ Pre - writing</b></i>



<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


Ss: 1 Student tells the way of learning
E


T: aks Ss some questions
Ss: answer the qs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

- Enjoyable (a)


- Lunar new year festival


- Celebrate ( the festival) đón tết
- Regards thân( kết thúc 1 lá th)
<i><b>b) Odering (write1)</b></i>


<b>B </b>–<b> D </b>–<b> A </b>–<b> C</b>


<i><b>c) Answer the Qs given: </b></i>
1. Who wrote the letter?
2. Who received it?


3. For what subjects did Hoa get good
grades ?


4. Was her Math result good?


5. What did her teacher ask her to do?


6. What is she going to do?


<i><b>2/.While – writing</b></i>


<i><b>*Help Lan write a letter to Donna</b></i>


<i><b>25 Le Thanh Tong street</b></i>



Hoa Binh


November11th,2005
Dear Donna ,


Thank you for your letter. I’m glad to
hear you had an interesting Mother’s
day.


We received our second semester
report last month. I got good grades for
G, P and M but My E and H results are
poor. My teacher advices me to improve
E and H. I think I have to study harder
next school year . In a few weeks, we
are going to celebrate the mid autumn
festival . That is an Autumn moon
festival in VN. This afternoon . I’m
going to Halong bay with my aunt and
uncle by bus and I’m going to stay there
with them until the festival comes. I’ll
send you a postcard from there.



Write soon and tell me all your news
Best Lan


<i><b>3/.Production</b></i>



 Write a letter to your friends to
tell him or her about your first
semester report and about your
Tet holiday.


T: ask Ss to put the parts of the letter
in the correct order


Ss: copy and repeat


Ss: answer the Qs to check Ss’
understanding


1. Hoa


2. Tim received it


3. Hoa got good grades for science,
E, history


4.


5. Her teacher asked her to spend
more time on it



6. She is going to Hue tonight to
celebrate the lunar new year
festival with her grandmother.


Ss: Do ex on page 51 . Ss have to
imagine that they are Lan and write a
letter to her penpal Donna in San
Fransisco by using the informations
given


T: give the correct answers


Ss: read the completed letter aloud


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

IV.Homework

.



- write a letter to your friend about your summer holiday


<i>V.Remarks and marks</i>



...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :


Period : 30


<b>Lesson 5 : Language focus</b>



<b>A/ Objective</b>


• <i><b>By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to use adverds of manners,and</b></i>
modal verbs “ should” as an advice reported speech with commands-request-advice in
reported speech


<b>B/ Teaching aids : </b>


• <i><b>Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards </b></i>


C/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’


<i><b>I/ Warm up</b></i>


<i><b>*Pelmanism</b></i>


Adj Adv
1. solf solfly
2. bad badly
3. good well
4. hard hard
5. fast fast


<i>II/ New lesson</i>


<i><b>1/. Presentation</b></i>



<i><b>a)Review the adverds of manner</b></i>


ex: Lan has a solf voice and she
usually speaks solfly


<b>adj + ly = adv</b>


<i><b>* Model verb: Should</b></i>


<i>- Dùng để diễn tả lời khuyên , lời đề</i>


<i>nghÞ</i>


+Prepare 10 cards with number from 1
to 10 one side and the “adj/adv” on the
other


+Make sure the “abj/adv” are mixed up
, then stick them on the board so that
sts can see the numbers


+T divides sts in to 2 teams and ask
them to choose numbers


+T sets the scence use the words from
the game pelmanism to complete the
sentences


+Ask sts some questions to check
sts’understanding


T: ask Ss to retell the formation and the


use of adverds of manner


Ss: answer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

Ex: Mr.Hao should repair the roof
Work harder
V-inf


<i>* Commands , request and advice in</i>


<i>reported speech</i>


<i>1. Câu tờng thuật hoặc câu gián tiếp</i>


- §ỉi “say” ra “tell” hc “ask”
eg: he said to his students:” Keep quiet
please


-> He told his students to keep quiet
<i>* Nếu câu trực tiếp ở dạng câu hỏi,</i>


<i>khng nh ta dùng form sau: </i>


<b>S + tell(ask, advice) + O + to + V</b>


<i>*Nếu câu trực tiếp ở dạng phủ định ta </i>
<i>dùng:</i>


<b>S+tell ( ask, advice) O+not+ To+ V</b>



eg: He said to Tom: don’t smoke
- >She told Tom not to smoke


<i>*Model:</i>


<b>S+ told/asked + Smb + to +V</b>


Eg: “you should work hard”


-My father told me to work hard
- >My mother told me that I
should work hard.


<i><b>2/Practice</b></i>



<i><b>Ex 1: complete the language focus 1 </b></i>
Keys:


b. hard
c. fast
d. badly
e. softly
Ex 4 ( P53)


S1:” Jim should spend more time on
Spanish pronunciation”


S2: Miss Jackson said you should
spend more time on



your---1. --- mend the door
<i><b>Ex 3: ( LF 3- P 53)</b></i>


1. Miss Jackson asked me to wait
outside her office


-Is Mr.Hao’house new ?


-Should Mr.Hao repair the roof ?
-Can we use should for request ? . . .


T: ask Ss to give sentences ask sts some
questions


+Let sts give the meaning and then
make form


Ss: Listen- repeat- make sentences then
copy


+Let sts take some notes


Ss: look at the pictures and work in
pairs to complete the dialogues


T: call on some pairs to practise


Ss: work in pairs to complete the
dialogues then practice.



Ss: practice in pairs ( close then open)
+T gives the right answer on the board


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

2. She told me to give you your report
card for this semester


3. Miss Jackson told me to help you
with your Spanish pronunciation
3/.Production


<i><b>Ex 2: work in pairs to do LF 2( p 53)</b></i>
2. Mr Hao should repair the roof
3. --- paint the house
4. ---cut the grass
5. --- replant the trees
Ex: Lan should study harder


+Ask sts to use the verbs to advise
Mr.Hao what to do


+Call some pairs to correct
+Let sts advise their friends


<i>IV.Homework</i>



- Have a look at Unit 6( getting started- Listen and read)


<i><b>V.Remarks and marks</b></i>



...


...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period: 31


Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB
Divison : 5 lessons


<b>A.</b> <b>Objectives: </b>


 By the end of the lesson , students will be able to


Know some activities of HCM young pioneer and youth organization
Ask for favors and respond to favors


The boy Scots of America <BSA>
Further practice near future
Gerund used after some verbs


<b>B.</b> <b>Language contents: </b>


<i>*Vocabulary: <n> </i> application , citizenship , drawing , fund , interest, . . .
(v) fill out , enroll , recycle , tutor , unite


<a.> academic , coeducation . . .


<b>C.</b> <b>Teaching aids: </b>


<b> Picture , radio , extraboard ,cards D.Teaching p rocedure :</b>



Lesson 1: Getting started Listen and read



<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activities </i>’
I. Warm up / Marks (5’)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

Collect waste help blind people


Answers


- clean up the streets
- help elderly people
- take part in sports


-support cultural activities
II. New lesson


1.Presentation
<i><b>a)vocabulary</b></i>


-Enroll (v) đăng ký , tham gia
-Application form (n) việc nộp đơn
-Outdooor activities (v) hđ ngoài trời
-Fill out (v) điền thông tin
-Acting (n) diễn kịch
<i><b>* Rub out and remember</b></i>
2. Practice


<i><b>a)Practice the dialogue with apartner</b></i>



<i><b>b)Answer the questions</b></i>
1. What is her name ?
2. Where does she live ?


3. What’s her telephone number ?
4. What is her date of birth ?
5. What are her hobies ?
<i><b>c)Complete Nga s details</b></i>’
<i>Name: Pham Mai Nga</i>


<i>Home address: 5 Tran Phu street</i>
<i>Phone number: no</i>


<i>Date of birth: April 22 1989</i>
<i>Sex: Female</i>


<i>Interests: Drawing, outdoor activities </i>


<i>and acting</i>


3.Production
<i><b>*Work in groups</b></i>


Teacher asks Ss to think of the
activities of the Y and Y programs
used to do


Teacher introduces new words
Ss repeat and say meaning
Then copy



+T plays the tape <2times>
-Sts listen


+ask sts to read silently to answer the
questions


+Call some pairs to read then check
sts’ pronunciation


+Let sts answer the questions about
Nga


+ask sts to fill out on the board
-Sts write on the board


+T & sts correct


+Call some sts to read the information


Teacher asks Ss to work in groups of 4
asking about hobbies, the date of birth,
outdoor activities


E. Homework (5



 Learn by heart new words
Th


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

 Write a short paragraph in order to introduce about yourselves and the


summer activities


 Do exercises in workbook and prepare: Speak


<i><b>F.Remarks and marks:</b></i>


...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period: 32


<b>Lesson 2 : Speak & Listen</b>


A. Objectives:


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for favors and offer assistance and
complete a song and get the content of the song


B. Teaching aids:


<b> Extraboard, textbook , radio C. Teaching procedure: </b>


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activities </i>’
<b>I. Warm up (3’)</b>


---(FAVOR)
Shark’s attack


II.New lesson



<b>*Speak</b>


1/Pre- speaking


.-favor (n) giúp đỡ
-.hurt (v) đau


.-a flat tire bánh xe xẹp hơi


<i>Asking for favors</i>


<i>(đề nghị giúp đỡ)</i> <i>Responding<sub>favors</sub></i> <i>to</i>


- Can / could you
help me, please ?
- Could you do me
a favor ?


- I need a favor


+...
...


+...?
+...?
(-)...


<i>Offering</i>



<i>assistance (đề nghị đc</i>
<i>giúp đỡ)</i>


<i>Responding to </i>
<i>assistance</i>


...?
...?
...?


Yes / No. Thank
you.


Yes.That’svery kind
of you.




+T holds class to play “ Shark’s
attack”


+Let sts play game Then Ss work in
groups to find out the word with five
letters


If their guess is wrong, the girl / boy
has to step down and if it is right ,
they will get one mark


+Teacher asks Ss the meaning of the


words


-Ss repeat


+T writes the phrases in the box and
rubs some phrases on the sub- board
+T asks Ss to find out the phrases for
responding to favors and offering
assistance


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

No, thank you
I’m fine
1/ What do you say to ask for a favor ?
2/ When do you ask for favor ?


3/ How do you say to respond to favor ?
2. While- speaking


<i><b>a) Practice the model dialogue</b></i>


<i>*Dialogue a: Mrs. Ngoc is carrying a </i>


heavy bag but she’s hurt her arm so she
needs some help


<i>*Dialogue b: A receptionist wants to help a </i>


tourist who needs to go to the nearest bank
<i><b>b) Make new dialogue </b></i>



Group 1: Tourist and you
Group 2: Neighbor and you
Group 3: friend and you
Group 4: you and your aunt


3/Post – speaking
<i><b>*Lucky number</b></i>


1 2 3
4 5 6


1. Could you help me , please ?
2. Lucky


3. May I help you ?
4. Let me help you ?
5. Lucky


6. Could you do me a favor ?


<b>*Listen</b>


1. Pre- listening
<i><b>a)New words</b></i>
Unite (v)
Peace (n)
Right (n)


<i>north south</i>




<i><b>b)Prediction </b></i>
2. While- listening
<i>Keys </i>


(1) unite (8) world
(2) peace (9) show
(3) right (10) place
(4) love (11) out
(5) north (12) stand
(6) south (13) world
(7) of


+T can ask some questions


If Ss can’t answer, teacher should
explain more carefully


+T asks Ss to practice in pairs (two
dialogues in textbook)


+T calls some pairs to practice
before class


+T corrects pronunciation
<i>-In order to ask for help which </i>


<i>structure did Mrs.Ngoc and the </i>
<i>tourist use ?</i>


<i>-What did she need to help ?</i>



+T divides the class into four groups
asks Ss to make similar dialogues
about some of the following
situations with a partner
-Ss work in pairs.


+Then call some pairs to practice in
front of the class


+T moves around the class and
helps students


<i>-What do you often do in your free </i>


<i>time ?</i>


<i>-Do you listen to music ?</i>


<i>-What kinds of music do you like ?</i>
<i>-Do you like listening to an English </i>
<i>song ? </i>


+Teacher asks some questions
-Ss answer


+Teacher presents some words
Ss repeat and say the meaning


+T asks Ss to guess the missing


words (page 56)


+Ask them to share with their
partners


Ss work in pairs


+Teacher asks Ss to listen to the
song twice (Don’t stop)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

3.Post - Listening compare with their partners-Students listen to the tape for the
third time. T can stop the tape
+T calls Ss to give the key


Teacher guides Ss how to sing the
song


Then call some students to sing
T can give marks if they sing well


D/. Homework



 learn words, phrases


 Do exercise 1 in workbook
 prepare: Lesson 3 Listen


<b>E/ Remarks and marks</b>


...



...
Date of planning :


Date of teaching :


Period: 33


<i>III.</i> <i>Lesson 3: Read</i>


<i><b>A.Objectives:</b></i>


 By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about a youth
organization – the Boy scouts of America (BSA)


B.Teaching aids


<b> textbook , flash cards C.Teaching procedure:</b>


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and students activities</i>’
I.Warm up (3’)


<i><b>*Chatting </b></i>


<i> Do you enjoy singing ?</i>


<i> Do you know the song of the Ho </i>


<i>Chi Minh Young Pioneer and </i>
<i>Young organization ?</i>



<i> Do you know any organization </i>


<i>in order countries ?</i>


II.New lesson
1.Pre- reading
<i><b>a)Vocabs</b></i>


<i>-Encourage (v) khuyÕn khÝch</i>
<i>-Citizenship (n) quyền công dân</i>
<i>-Coeducational (a) thuộc về giáo dục </i>


<i>cho cả nam , n÷</i>


<i>-Lead/ led (v) dẫn đờng</i>
<i>-Establish (v) thiết lập</i>


<i>- Fitness (n) sức khoẻ</i>
<i>- Association (n) hội hớng đạo</i>


<i><b>* Slap the board</b></i>


Teacher asks some questions
Ss answer


<i>+Teacher introduces “ There are </i>


<i>some in the USA. What are they ? </i>
<i>Let s see in the text</i>’ ”



+T presents new words


Ss repeat and say the meaning


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

<i><b>c) T/ F statements Prediction</b></i>


1. The boy scouts of America is a
youth organization


2. Scouting began America


3. William Boyce is a businessman
in London


4. Boys and girls can join BSA
5. The scouting Association is the


biggest voluntary youth organization in
the world


2. While – reading (15’ )


<i><b>a)Read the text and check T/F</b></i>
<i><b>statements</b></i>


Guess Answ


er Correction


1.


2.
3.
4.
5.


T
F
F
F
T


Scout began in
England


William Boyce is an
American


businessman


BSA is mainly for
boys


<i><b>b)Fill in the missing dates</b></i>
<b>Answers</b>


a) 1907 c) 1910


b) 1009 d) 1994


<i><b>c)Answer the questions (p.57)</b></i>



a/ Scouting began in England in 1907
b/ The meeting between a boy scout
and Mr William Boyce led to the
Scouts Association crossing the
Atlantic in 1910


c/ Girls can join in the Girl Guides
Association and Camp Fire Boys and
Girls


d/ The three aims are building character,
goodcitizenship and personal fitness


+T holds class to play “ Slap the
board”


+T sticks the poster with the
statements on the blackboard and
guess what is


True , what is false
-Students work in pairs


+Teacher asks Ss to read the
passage on page 57 and check if
their prediction is correct or not
+Give feedback


+Ask them to correct false


statements


+Teacher asks Ss to do exercise 1 page
57


-Ss work in pairs


-After that Ss and answer the
questions in exercise 2


-Ss work in pairs
+T corrects


+T calls an excellent student in
class to practice with the teacher
+T – interviewer / S – member of
BSA


citizenship


encourage


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

3. Post – reading (10’)
<i><b>*Interview</b></i>


Interview Member of BSA


1) When did
scouting begin ?
2) Where were the


aims established ?
3) Can a girl join
the BSA ?


4) How many
members does the
scouting


Association have
now ?


5) It is the largest
voluntary youth
organization in the
world ?


6) Are you happy
to join the BSA ?


In 1907 in England


They were established in
1907. They are ...




No. It’s mainly for boys
Over 25 million


Yes, of course



Yes


+T calls some pairs of students to
play the roles of the interviewer and
the member of BSA


-Ss work in pairs


D/Homework (2 )



 learn by heart new words
 Write the summary of the BSA
 Do exercise 2,3,4 in workbook
 prepare: Lesson 5 Write


<i><b>E/Remarks and marks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 34


<b>Lesson 4 : Write </b>


<i><b>A.Objectives:</b></i>


 By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter about a future


plan using “be going to”


B.Teaching aids:


<b> textbook, extraboards C.Teaching procedures:</b>


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and students activities </i>’
I. Warm up / mark (5’)


Revision of the structure “be going to”


<i>Example:</i>


.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

T: I’m going to accept their invitation
S1: I’m going to buy a new bicycle
S2: I’m going to clean the house
S3: I’m going to dust the furniture
S4: I’m going to explain...
...


II.Checking the old lesson
-Rewrite vocabs


III.New lesson
1. Pre-writing (15’)
<i><b>a)Read the notice</b></i>


a) What do members of the Y & Y


have to do in the recycling program ?
b) What is the purpose of the recycling
program ?


c) What other programs can members
of the Y & Y participate in ?


<i><b>b)Complete the letter</b></i>
<i> Answers</i>


(1) Community (6) save
(2) recycling (7) raise


(3) collect (8) participating


(4) send (9) planting


(5)recycling (10) helping
<i><b>c)Read the dialogue</b></i>


2. While-writing (15’)


<b>*Dictation</b>


Dear Mom and Dad,


I’m very happy to tell you that I’m
going to join the Y & Y Green Group
of my school



The Green Group is holding an
enviroment month plan. We are going
to clean the banks of the lakes on
weekends. We are going to plant trees
and flowers in the school garden and
water them every afternoon after class.
We are planting young trees and plants
to sell to other schools


We hope that we can give more green
color to the city and earn some money
for our school Y & Y


The program is very interesting and
useful, isn’t it ?


I’ll tell you more about the group
activities later


Love,


+Call 3 sts


+Ask sts to read the notice p.58


teacher explaints some difficult words
-Sts read


+Have sts answer some questions
-Sts answer



+Ask sts to read the letter Nga sends to
Linh


-Sts read the letter and complete the
letter


+Let sts write the words on the board
+T gives feed back and corrects


+T sets the scene “ Hoa talks to her
aunt about Y&Y Green group , about
the activities that she is going to do”
+Ask sts to read the dialogue between
Hoa and her aunt


-Sts read


+Ask sts some questions to check their
understanding


-Sts answer


<i> Why does Hoa look happy ?</i>
<i> What she going to do in the </i>


<i>enviroment month ?</i>


<i> What are they doing to earn money </i>



<i>for their school Y & Y ?</i>


+Let sts help Hoa to write a letter to
her parents


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

Hoa


3. Post-writing<b> (8 )</b>’


<i><b>*Correction</b></i> +Have sts tick the poster on the board
+Get the whole class to read the 4
letters and correct them


D. Homework (2 )



 Write a letter to a friend


 Do exercises 5,6 in workbook
 Prepare: Lesson 6 Language Focus


<i><b>E.Remarks and marks</b></i>


...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

<b>Lesson 5: Language focus </b>



<b>A.Objectives </b>


• By the end of the lesson , students will be able to know present simple with


future meaning , practice in gerund used after some verbs :love , like , hate , enjoy
.Wh-questions and ask for favor .


<b>B.Teaching aids</b>


• Textbook , extraboard
C.Teaching procedures


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and students activities</i>’
I.Warm up


Clean up the beach


help blind people




Take part in sports ...
II.New lesson


1.Presentation


<i><b>a)Present simple with future</b></i>
<i><b>meaning</b></i>


Lan: Where do we collect and empty
garbage ?


Mai: At Dong Xuan market



Lan: When do we collect an empty
garbage ?


Mai: On January 9th


Lan: What time do we start and
finish ?


Mai: We start at 8a.m and finish at 5
p.m


*The usage :


-Simple present tense to express an
action with the future meaning
<i><b> b)Gerunds</b></i>


ex: She likes drawing and she
V-ing


enjoy acting , too.
V-ing


Like/hate


S + Love/enjoy + V-ing
Mind


-after some verbs and prepositions



+T divides class in to 2 teams to go to
the board to write


-Sts write <in 5’>


+T sets the scene and introduces the
dialogue “Lan & Mai are members of
the Y&Y organization they are talking
about the summer activities program
+Ask sts to complete the following
dialogue


+Ask sts to play the roles of Mai &
Lan to practice the dialogue


-Sts practice in pairs <3 pairs>


+Ask sts some questions then let sts
take note the usage


<i>-When do we use where/ when / what </i>“


<i>time ?</i>”


<i>-Is the date at present or in the future ?</i>
<i>-Which tense do we use in the dialogue</i>
<i>?</i>


+T asks sts some qs
-What are Nga’hobbies ?


-Sts answer


+T writes on the board


<i>-Which word go after like/enjoy</i>“ ”


<i>-What do we call drawing/acting </i>“ ”


<i><gerund></i>


<i>-What is the form of gerund</i>“ ”


<i>V-ing</i>


<i>-When do we use gerund ?</i>


<i><after some verbs : like,love . . .and </i>
<i>prepositions ></i>


+Let sts read the dialogue then ask sts
The Y&Y


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

<i><b>c)Modal verbs</b></i>


An: May I help you ?


Ba : Yes , can you show me the way to
the nearest bank ?


An: Sure. Turn right when you get out


of the hotel turn left at the first


corner . It’s on your right .
Ba: Thank you very much
2.Practice


<i><b>a)Language focus 1</b></i>


1. Collect and empty garbage /
Jan.9


2. PLant & water trees along
street city center streets/ 7.am
– 10.


3. Help street children / March .26
4. Help the elderly / orphanage
Ex:When do we collect and empty
garbage ?


- > January 9th
<i><b>b)Language focus 2</b></i>
1.play soccer / volleyball
2.watch TV / listen to music
3.read book / do homework
4.cook meal / decorate the house
Ex: What are your hobbies?
-I like play soccer & volleyball
<i><b>c)Language focus 3 </b></i>



.What do you say to ask for a favor ?
.How do you say to respond to favor ?


 a)


A: buy a ticket


B: take me across the road


C: help me with this math problem
D: water the flowers in the garden


 b)
Do you need
Me help you
Very kind
3.Production
<i><b>Survey</b></i>


S1: Do you like listening to music ?
S2: Yes, I do. What about you ?
S1: So do I


some qs to check their understanding
<i>-What does An say ?</i>


<i>-What s for ?</i>’


<i>-Another way to offer assistance ?</i>
<i>-How do you say to respond to </i>


<i>assistance ?</i>


+Ask sts to practice asking and
answering aout the Y&Y activities
program by using the following cues
+Call some pairs to play the role before
the class


+T corrects sts’ pronunciation


+Prepare 5 cards with these cues on
them . then models the first 2 cues
-Sts repeat in choral twice


+Sts drill the qs of exchange first , then
drill the answer


+Ask sts to practice in pairs


+Let sts go around class & ask their
freinds


T introduces the aim of exercise 3
and reviews some details


Ss answer


T asks Ss to work in pairs and
complete dialogues



T gives the key


<b>D/Home work</b>


• Prepare for test
<b>E/Remarks and marks</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 36


- Revision –



<i><b>A/ Objectives:</b></i>


• <i><b>By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to review tenses and vocabulary</b></i>
learnt from unit 4 to unit 6


<b>B/.Content:</b>


A. Grammar


1.The past simple with used to :


 Dùng để nói về thói quen hay việc thờng làm trong quá khứ
Ex : I used to cook meal


She didn’t use to get up early
Did you use to get up early ?



<b>Form</b>


+ S + used to + V


- S + didn’t + use to + V
? Did + S + use to + V ?


2. Prepositions of time :



in, at, on, between, after, before


<b>at: time</b>


- at noon : vµo bi tra
- at midnight


- at breakfast/lunch/dinner
- at sunrise/dawn lóc b×nh minh
- at sunset/dusk lúc hoàng hôn


<b>on: + day</b>


- On Monday/Sunday
- On+ ngày tháng năm


<b>In: tháng hoặc năm không có ngày đi kèm</b>
- in january/february/2003


<i><b>3.Adverbs of manner (Trạng từ chỉ thể cách )</b></i>



ex: Lan has a solf voice and she usually speaks solfly


adj + ly = adv


<i>4. Model verb: Should</i>


 Dùng để diễn tả lời khuyên , lời đề nghị
Ex: Mr.Hao should repair the roof


Work harder
V-inf


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

<i>a .C©u tờng thuật hoặc câu gián tiếp</i>


- Đổi say ra tell hc “ask”


eg: he said to his students:” Keep quiet please


 > He told his students to keep quiet


 Nếu câu trực tiếp ở dạng câu hỏi, khẳng định ta dùng form sau:


<b>S + tell(ask, advice) + O + to + V</b>
*Nếu câu trực tiếp ở dạng phủ định ta dùng:


<b>S+tell ( ask, advice) O+not+ To+ V</b>


eg: He said to Tom: don’t smoke
- >She told Tom not to smoke
Eg: “you should work hard”



 My father told me to work hard


 >My mother told me that I should work hard.
<i><b>6)Present simple with future meaning</b></i>


Lan: Where do we collect and empty garbage ?
Mai: At Dong Xuan market


Lan: When do we collect an empty garbage ?
Mai: On January 9th


Lan: What time do we start and finish ?
Mai: We start at 8a.m and finish at 5 p.m
*The usage :


• Simple present tense to express an action with the future meaning
<i><b>7)Gerunds</b></i>


ex: She likes drawing and she
V-ing


enjoy acting , too.
V-ing


Like/hate


S + Love/enjoy + V-ing
Mind



• after some verbs and prepositions
<i><b>8)Modal verbs</b></i>


An: May I help you ?


Ba : Yes , can you show me the way to the nearest bank ?


An: Sure. Turn right when you get out of the hotel turn left at the first corner .
It’s on your right .


Ba: Thank you very much
<b>II.Practice</b>


<i><b>1.Choose the best answer</b></i>


1. . . you stay up late last week ? – Yes , I had to study for the test .
A . Does B . Did C . Were


2. I . . . to listen to my grandmother’s falk tales .
A . used to B . use to C . using


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

A . go B . going C . went
4 . We like . . . to music .


A . listening B . listen C . listened
5 . Tim stopped . . . to have a drink .


A . work B . works C . working


2.Rewrite the sentences use the suggestions



<b>a) “ Could you buy me an English exercise book, Ha ?”</b>


Nam asked Ha...


<b>b) “Please turn off the radio”</b>


Phuong told Tuan...


<b>c) “Don’t talk duringthe test, Nam”, his teacher said</b>


Nam’s teacher told him...


<b>d) “You should improve your English, Phong”</b>


 > The teacher said...


<i><b>C/Homework</b></i>


 Learn by heart structures


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 37


<b>Written Test 2</b>


A/The aim .


 Listening : listen to a dialogue then choose the right answers
 Reading : read then fill in the missing words


 Writing : write sentences use the words in the box with “used to” .
 Language focus : circle the best answer to complete the sentences .



B/Ma TrËn


Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng


TN TL TN TL TN TL


1. Listening 5


2,5 5 2,5


II. Reading 5


2,5 5 2,5


III.Writing 5


2,5 5 2,5
IV.Language


focus


10
2,5


10
2,5


<b>Tæng</b> <b>10</b>



<b> 2,5</b>
<b>10</b>


<b> 5,0</b>
<b>5</b>


<b> 2,5</b>
<b>25</b>
<b> 10</b>
<i><b>C/Content </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<i>*Listen to the dialogue then circle the best answer in A,B,or C to complete the sentences</i>
<i>(2,5pts).</i>


1 . He wants to go to . . . .


A . the bank B . the post office C . the head office


2 . She . . . the heavy package .


A . lets the man carry B . drops C . herself can carry


3 . She is a . . . .of the Young Pioneers League .


A . leader B . member C . student


4 . What are they talking about ? - . . . .. . .


A . studying in a club B . applying to a club C . going to a club



5 . What kind of music does he like best ?


A . country music B . classical music C . Pop music
II. Reading


<i>*Read the passage and circle the best word in A , B or C to complete each blank</i>


Ten-year-old Tran Bao Tram is a (1) . . . . .girl . She learns English very (2) . . . ..
At age 10 , she can read short stories by famous English and American (3) . . .
..Bao Tram has a good study (4) . . . .everyday after school she (5) . . . .. . her
homework , watches cartoons then reads stories in Viet Namese and in English .


1. a. lazy b. stupid c. gifted
2. a. quick b. quicker c. quickly
3. a. writers b. readers c. artists
4. a. revision b. Habit c. Experiment
5. a. Does b. Makes c. learns
III. Language focus


<i><b>*Choose the best option (A , B or C ) to complete each of the following sentences .(2,5pts)</b></i>


1. . . you stay up late last night ? – Yes , I had to study for the test .
A . Do B . Did C . Were


2. I . . . to listen to my grandmother’s falk tales .
A . used B . used to C . using


3 . Where did you go last summer vacation ? – I . . . .to Hue .
A . going B . go C . went



4 . We like . . . to music .


A . listen B . listening C . listened
5 . Tim stopped . . . to have a drink .


A . working B . work C . works
6 . The teacher asked me . . . you this novel
A . give B . to give C . gave
7 . The browns is . . . camp next week


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

A . Could B . May C . Should


9 . You should work harder . . . your English pronunciation .
A . in B . at C . on


10 . What . . . . .you . . . . .tonight ?


A . are – doing B . were – doing C . will – doing
IV. Writing


<i><b>*Write 5 things that you did / didn’t use to do . Here are some suggestions (2,5)</b></i>


<i>(ViÕt 5 c©u sư dơng used to / didn’t use to )</i>


- Play soccer – make a cake – get up early


- Go shopping – stay up late – go to school by bike
- read novels – do the chores – live in Hue


Ex :- I used to do the chores




 I didn’t use to make a cake


1. ...
2. ...
3. ...
4. ...
5. ...


<i><b>Key:</b></i>


I . Listening


Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm


1 . B 2 . A 3 . C 4 . B 5 . C

<b>Tapecripts :</b>



1 . Lan : Can you tell me where the nearest post office is ?
<b>Ba : The post office is opposite the bank </b>


V. She lets the man carry the heavy package .


VI. Lan : Are you a member of the Young Pioneers Leage ?
Ba : Sure , most students are .


VII. Lan : What are they talking about ?
Ba : They are applying to a club .


5 . Lan : I prefer pop music to classical music . How about you ?


Ba : I prefer to .


<b>II.Reading </b>


<i>IV.</i> <i>Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm</i>


1. c 2 . c 3 . a 4 . b 5 . a
III.Language focus


<i>Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm</i>


1 . B 2 . A 3 . C 4 . B 5 . A
6 . B 7 . C 8 . A 9 . C 10 . A
IV.Writing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

Unit 7. My neighborhood
<i><b>Division: 5 lessons</b></i>
A/.<b>Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:
- Use comparisons


- Ask and offer assistance
- Write community notice
<b>B/.Language content</b>


<i>1. Vocabulary: swimming pool, wet market , grocery store,contact, notice, serve </i>…
2. Grammar:


- Present perfect with for and since
- Comparisons with : -like



- (not) as ….as,


- (not ) the same as…,
 different from…


c/. Teaching aids


- Stereo ,Pictures, cards ,extraboardboard


D/. Teaching Procedure
Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period : 39


Lesson 1:



Getting started – listen and read



<b>A/ Objectives</b>


• <i>By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to know more about Na’s new</i>
neighbour and know how to use present perfect tense with “have been”


<i><b>B/Teaching Content:</b></i>


<i>1.Vocabulary: wet market, swimming pool, stadium , grocery store…</i>


<i>2.Grammar:</i>



 present perfect tense with have been


<b>C/ Teaching aids </b>


• Students’ books, extraboard board, pictures, cards, stereo…


D/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’
<i>I/ Warm up: Getting started</i>


<i><b>+ Names of the places</b></i>
a. grocery store


b. stadium
c. wet market
d. drug store
e. hairdresser’s
f. swimming pool


T: ask Ss to match the names of the
places with the suitable pictures


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

<i>II/New lesson </i>
<i>1/Presentation</i>


<i><b>a) Vocabulary:</b></i>


- close by (adv) = near



- too + adj + V : quá đến nỗi
không thể làm việc gì


- just around the corner : ngay
gãc phè


- pancake (n) b¸nh khoai
- tasty(a) = delicious


<i><b>b)Checking vocabs </b></i>
<i>*What and where </i>


<i>2/ Practice</i>


<i><b>a) Practice the dialogue in pairs</b></i>
<i><b>b) Complete the sentences </b></i>
Key:


a. Na is new to the neighborhood
b. Last week


c. Tired
d. Restaurant
e. Hue


f. Pankaces
<i><b>c)T/F statements</b></i>


a. Na has been here since last years
b. Nam has lived here for 10 years


c. Nam doesn’t like Hue’s food
d. Na’s mother is too tired


<i><b>3/.Production</b></i>



<i><b>* Write </b></i>


<i><b>1. How long have you live in</b></i>


<i><b>your neighborhood ?</b></i>



2. Do you like it ?


3. Is there a restaurant / market ?
4. How do you do to keep your
neighborhood clean ?


T: Today we will revive the names of
places in the neighborhood and learn
The present perfect tense. You are
going to hear a dialogue between Na
and Nam. You listen to it and answer
the following qs.


T: play the tape


<i>1. Who is new to the neighborhood ?</i>
<i>2. Does Nam live in the</i>


<i>neighborhood?</i>



<i>3. What is around the corner in the</i>
<i>neighborhood?</i>


<i>4. Is the food good?</i>


Ss: listen to the tape . underline the
new words and structure and then
answer the qs


T: explain


Ss: copy and repeat. Then make similar
sentences


+Call some pairs to read then check
their pronunciation


-Sts read in pairs


Ss: work individually to do the task.
Then compare with their partner


T: ask 1 S to read completed sentences
before the class


T: have sts do T/F statements then let
sts translate “for , since”


+Ask sts to write a passage about their
neighborhooh by answering the


following questions


Ss: work in 4 groups
T: go around and helps Ss


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

E/Homework.



- Learn by heart new words
- Ex 1,2(P 44. Workbook)
<i><b>F/Remarks and marks</b></i>


<b>...</b>
<b>...</b>


<i><b>Date of planning :</b></i>
<i><b>Date of teaching :</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 40</b></i>


<i><b>Lesson 2 : Speak & Listen</b></i>


<i><b>A/Objective</b></i>


 By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to talk about how to send parcels or
letters , what Na is going to do on the weekend by listening


<b>B/Teaching content</b>


<i>1. Vocabulary: parcel, airmail, surface mail , charge</i>
<i>2. Grammar: conversations in post office</i>


<b>C/ Teaching aids : </b>



• <i><b>Students’ books, extraboard boards, pictures, cards, stereo </b></i>


D/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’
<i><b>I/Checking the old lesson</b></i>


<i>II/Warm up</i>


* Qs for chatting:


<i>- what is it? ( a letter)</i>


<i>- Where can we post it to our </i>


<i>friends? ( at the post office)</i>


<i>- How can I post it? ( stick stam</i>


<i>on it)</i>


<i>- How much does it cost? </i>


<i>( 800Vn dong)</i>


<i>- Is it more expensive when I </i>


<i>send a parcel? ( yes, of </i>
<i>course)</i>



<i>- Have you ever sent a letter or </i>


<i>a pacel?</i>


<i>- Do you know how much the </i>


<i>domestic mail charges?</i>


<i>III/New lesson </i>


<b>*Speak</b>


+Let sts rewrite vocabs then give
examples with them


T: show a letter and asks Ss questions
Ss: answer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

<i><b>1/. Pre-speaking</b></i>



<i><b>a) Vocabulary:</b></i>


- Parcel (n) bu phÈm


- airmail (n) th ,bu phẩm(bằng
đờng máy bay)


- surface mail (n) th ,bu
phẩm(bằng đờng bộ)


- weight ( n) trọng lợng
- weigh ( v) cân


- Change (v) đổi , cớc phí
<i><b>b)Read the dialogue</b></i>


<i><b>c)Answer the questions</b></i>


1. Does Mrs Kim send the parcel
airmail or surface mail? Why?
2. What’s the weight of her parcel?
3. How muchs does she pay?


<i><b>2/.While-speaking</b></i>



<i><b>a)Practice the dialogue in pairs </b></i>
<i><b>b)make similar bruchers and </b></i>
<i><b>informations in Ex 2</b></i>


Eg:


S1: Good morning .what can I do for
you?


S2: I want to send this postcard to
HCM city.


S1: Do you want to send it airmail or
surface mail?



S2: I don’t know. How much is the
surface mail?


S1: It’s 800dong


S2: What about……….?


<i><b>3/.Post-speaking</b></i>



<i><b>* Re- arrange the following</b></i>
<i><b>dialogue:</b></i>


a. Do you want to send it by airmail
or surface mail?


b. Oh! That’s too expenxive
c. All right


T: explain


Ss: copy and repeat


T: Set the sence: Mrs kim wants to
send a parcel to Quy Nhon , so she
goes to the post office.


Ss: listen and find out the new words
S: read the dialogue and anwer the Qs:
1.surface mail because it is much
cheaper



2.5 kilograms
3. 19.200 dongs


Ss: Practice the dialogue in pairs


Ss: work in pairs to make similar
dialogues (10 mins)


Ss : some pairs practice in front of the
class


Ss: work in groups.then practice in
pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

d. Excuse me. I’d like to send this
parcel to Hanoi


e. That’s better.I’ll send it surface
f. How much is airmail?


g. Surface is cheaper . It’s only
22.000d


h. I’ll have to weigh the parcel first .
Four kilograms. That will be
43.500dongs.


<b>*Listen</b>



Qs:


1. What are they doing ?


2. Can you guess what they are
talking about?


<i>3. Do you remember about Na <Na </i>


<i>has moved to a new neighborhood </i>


<i><b>1. Pre-listening</b></i>



<i><b>a) Brainstorming and guessing</b></i>


1. movies: the newcomer( has been
done)


2. Place: stadium, school ground,
city/town ground)


3. Activity( drama, E speaking
club/contest , dancing, picture
exhibition, music)


4. Place: ( gallery, culture house,
shool, city hall)


<i><b>* Vocabulary:</b></i>



- Town ground (n) s©n V§ tp
- English speaking contest (n)


cuộc thi nói tiếng Anh giỏi
- The new comer (n) ng mới đến
- Cultural house (n) nhà VH
- Versus (v) đấu với
- Photo exhibition (n) Tr lãm


¶nh


<i><b>2/.While-listening</b></i>



<i><b>a) Listen 1</b></i>
Answer:


a . the newcomer
b. town ground
c. E speaking contest
d. culture house


<i><b>b)True /false or no information (P.66)</b></i>
Keys:


a. T
b. F
c. F
d. T


T: ask Ss questions


Ss: answer


T: ask Ss to look at 4 advertisements of
“what’s on this week “ . Gets Ss to
guess what’s is in the blanks 2-3-4
Ss: guess


T: explain the new words
Ss: listen-copy


Ss: listen and repeat new words.


T: Na has moved to a new
neighbourhood . She is talking to Nam
about the activities she will do on the
weekend.You listen to the tape
between Na and Nam and fill in the
balnks with the suitable place or
program


Ss: listen to the tape 2 times and give
the answers


Ss: compare the answers in pairs.
T: Give the correct answers


T: ask Ss to guess before listening
Ss: guess


T: take notes on board then asks Ss to


listen to the tape several times


Ss: compare the answers with the
others.and then listen to the tape once
again to check


T: Give correct answers


+Let sts answer some qs about Na
Key: - Yes , she does


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

e. T


f. No information


<i><b>3/ Post-listening</b></i>



<i><b>*Answer the questions </b></i>
1. Does Nga like music ?


2. Who does Na go to the soccer
match with ?


What time does the match start ?


E/.Homework

.



- Learn by heart new words
- Write a similar dialogue
- Ex 2 ( Text book .P65)



<i><b>F.Remarks and marks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period : 41


<i>V.</i> <i>Lesson 3: Read</i>


<b>A/ Objectives</b>



 By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to understand the passage about a
new shopping mall


<i><b>B/ Content:</b></i>


1. Vocabulary: shopping mall, store, wide sellection of products, concern, organize…


2. Grammar: present perfect tense


<b>C/ Teaching aids :</b>


• <i><b>Students’ books, extra board, pictures, cards, stereo </b></i>


D/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’



<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- Tell the changes in your town


<i>II/Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Guessing words:</b></i>


1. A place where you can buy
vegetables and fruit ( Supermarket)
2. A place where you can buy


vegetables and fruit ( grocery store)
3. ………..books ( bookstore)
4. ……….come to eat ( restaurant)
5. ……….come to see movies


( movie- theater)


- Ss do the task (2 Ss)


T: Give the definitions and gets Ss to
find out the words as quickly as
possible.


Ss: Play in 2 groups


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

6. A person who comes to the store and
buy Smth ( customer)



<i>III/New lesson </i>


<i><b>1. Pre-reading</b></i>



<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


<i>- Shopping mall(n) = mall trung</i>


<i>tâm thơng mại</i>


- Convenient (a) tiƯn lỵi
- Humid ( a) Èm ít
- Offer (v) cung cÊp
- resident (v) dân c
- Concerned (a) lo lắng
<i>*Explain the meaning </i>


- wider selection of products
<i>(n)sự lựa chọn hàng hoá phong</i>


<i>phú hơn</i>


- 50 air- conditioned speciality
<i>stores: 50 gian hàng đc trang bị</i>


<i>máy lạnh</i>


<i>- open daily : më cưa hµng ngµy</i>
- special discounts during the first



<i>two weeks: giảm giá đặc bit</i>


<i>trong hai tuần đầu</i>
<i><b>b)Checking vocabs</b></i>


<i><b>c)Brain storming: the convenience of the </b></i>
<i><b>new shopping mall</b></i>


- customers don’t care of the
weather


- have fun or relax while
shopping


- wide sellection of goods
- shop in comfort


- lower price


- buy many things at the same
time


<i><b>2/.While-reading</b></i>



<i><b>a) Read the text and corect T/F</b></i>
Answers:


<i>a. F ( the mall is open daily ( 7 days a</i>
<i>week)</i>



<i>b. F ( there are 50 stores in the mall)</i>
<i>c. F. Not every one is pleased about the</i>


<i>mall)</i>
<i>d. T</i>
<i>e. T</i>


T: explain the new words based on
the text


Ss: Listen- repeat- make similar
sentences then copy


+T let sts translate some phrases
-Sts translate


T: Introduces the topics and asks Ss
to do brainstorming


Ss: do the task


T: Now you read the text and the
advertisement and decide whether
the statements are T or F.correct the
False ones


Ss: read the text and do the Ex
1(P68) individually then compare
with the partners



T: gives correct answers


T: ask Ss to read the text silently and
answer the Qs


Ss: read the text and answer the Qs
individually ( 10”). Then compare
the answer with the partner.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

<i><b>b) Answer the Qs ( P .68)</b></i>
Keys:


a. It is very different from the present
shopping area. All the shops are in
one roof.That will be very convinient,
expecially during the hot and humid
summer months. Customers will shop
in comfort and won’t notice the
weather.


b. In the shopping mall, there are 50
air-conditioned specialty stores, 4 movie
theaters and 10 restaurants; thers is
also a children’s play area.


c. I think the new shopping mall will
take their business.


3/.Post-reading



- read and then translate the text into
Vietnamese


T: call on an excellent S in class to
read and then translate the text into
Vn


Ss: read and translate


E/.Homework.



- Learn by heart new words


- Read and translate the text into Vietnamese


<i><b>F/Remarks and marks </b></i>


<b>...</b>
<b>...</b>


<i><b>Date of planning :</b></i>
<i><b>Date of teaching :</b></i>


Period : 42


Lesson 4 :



Write & Language focus 5



<i><b>A/ Objectives</b></i>



 By the end of the lesson ,Students will be able to write a notice and make
comparisions by using : like, the same as, different from...


<b>B/ Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, sextar boards, pictures, cards.


<b>C/ Teaching procedure</b>



<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
<i><b>I/Checking the old lesson</b></i>


- Tell smth about the new shopping mall
<i><b>II/ Warm up</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

*Pelmanism


-Different > < same
-Cheap > < expensive
-Long > < short
-Modern > < old
-Small > < big


<i><b>III/ New lesson </b></i>


<i><b>*Language focus 5</b></i>
a) Presentation


<b>Ex1: The red book is the same as the </b>


yellow one


<b>Ex2: The red book is as big as the </b>
yellow one


<b>Ex3: The yellow book is different from </b>
the brown note book


<b>Ex4: The yellow is not as/so big as the </b>
brown note book


Form :


(1) S + be + the same as ...
(2) different from ...
(3) as + adj + as ...


(4) not + so + adj + as . . .


b) Practice


a. not as large as
b. different from
c. different from
d. the same as
e. not so big as
f. the same as
g. as long as


h. not so modern as


i. not so cheap as
<i><b>*Write</b></i>


<i><b>1/Pre-writing</b></i>



<i><b>a) Read the community notice</b></i>
*Answer the questions


<i>- Why are the residents and store</i>


<i>owners on TP street going to hold a</i>
<i>meeting ?</i>


<i>- When will they hold a meeting ? what</i>
<i>time ?</i>


<i>- Where will they hold the meeting ?</i>
<i>-How many parts does a notice usually</i>
<i>include?</i>


<i><b> b) Read the passage </b></i>


<i>-What is the E speaking club going to</i>


on it , then tick 10 on the board so sts
can only see the numbers


-Sts go on untill all the cards are
turned over . The team which has
more marks wins the game



+T shows 3 books , ared book and a
yellow one which have the same size
and a big brown notebook then ask
sts to make comparison


-Sts listen then make examples
+T asks sts some questions to check
their understanding


<i>-Is <the red book> S ?</i>
<i>-Is <is> tobe ?</i>


<i>-Which word go after tobe ?</i>“ ”


<i>-Are <ex1-ex2> the same meaning ?</i>
<i>-Which word go after and before</i>
<i><big> ?</i>


<i>-Are <ex1-ex2> the same meaning ?</i>
<i>-Are the yellow and brown books the</i>
<i>same ?</i>


<i>-Are they different ? <yes></i>
<i>....</i>


+Let sts do exercise 5 <p.70>
Explain the aim of the exercise
-Sts do exercise



+Call some sts to check


+T let sts read the notice and answer
some qs


Ss: read then answer


Ss: topic, time, place , participants


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

<i>hold ?</i>


<i>-Where and when will it be hold ?</i>
<i>-What time ?</i>


<i>-Who is the person to contact ?</i>


2/.While-writing
Answer:


<b>The shool english speaking club</b>


Holding a speaking contest to
celebrate the teacher’s day
<i>Date: November15</i>


<i>Time: 7.30pm to 10.00 pm</i>
<i>Place: Hall 204, Building G</i>


<i>Please contact : Tran thi Thu Hang of </i>



<i>class 8H at the above address for more </i>
<i>information</i>


<i><b>3/Production</b></i>



<i><b>* Write a notice for the class meeting.</b></i>


+ Base on the above notice , you
write a similar notice for the E
speaking club about the E speaking
contest


+T let sts write individually


Ss: write individually then change
the notice to the others


T:Give correct answer


T: Now you use the a bove notices as
examples and write a notice for a
class meeting


Ss: work in groups of 4 to write the
notice


( which group write the most quickly
and correctly is the winner)


Ss: write the notice on board



E/.Homework.



- write a notice for a picnic or a sport club


<i><b>F/Remarks and marks </b></i>


<b>...</b>
<b>...</b>


<i><b>Date of planning :</b></i>
<i><b>Date of taching :</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 43</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

<b>A/ Objectives</b>


• <i><b>By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to practice further about present</b></i>
perfect tense and comparisions of adjectives


<i><b>B/Content:</b></i>


<i>1.Vocabulary: adjectives</i>


<i>2.Grammar: - present perfect tense</i>
 comparisions of adjectives


<b>C/ Teaching aids : </b>


• <i>Ss’ books, extra boards, pictures, cards </i>



D/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- Write the notice you wrote at home


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i> Match each verb to its</i>


<i>past participle( Ex 1-P 69)</i>


V Vp.p
be - been
go - gone
eat - eaten
live - lived
attend - attended
see - seen
work - worked
collect - collected


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1. Present perfect with for and since</b></i>


Ex :



<i><b>- We have been here since last week</b></i>
<i><b>-I have lived in Tan Lac for 20 years</b></i>
<b>-He has not gone to Hue </b>


<b>-How long have you lived in PC ?</b>
<b>- Has she been there?</b>


* Form:


-S + have/has + Ved(II)


-S + have/has + (not) + Ved(II)
-Have/ Has + S + Ved(II)…?
* Use:


<i> - To express an action which happened in </i>


<i>the past and is still going on now.</i>


<i>- Or action which has just happened</i>
* Note:


She’s = she has
I’ve = I have
<i><b>- Since: a point of time</b></i>
<i><b>- For : a period of time </b></i>
2/Practice


Write a notice



T: asks Ss to work in pairs
Ss: works in pairs


T: give correct answers


Ss: read the words given aloud


+Let sts find out the present perfect in
the dialogue


-Sts find out sentences


+Let sts look at the examples and ask
them some qs to check sts
understanding


<i>-Is <we> S ?</i>


<i>-Is <have> a helping V ?</i>
<i>-Is <been> V-inf or Vp.p ?</i>


<i>-Is <since> a period of time or a</i>
<i>period of time ?</i>


<i>-When do we use present perfect ?</i>


T: asks Ss to make the form and the
use of Ss: answer


Ss: Listen- repeat- make sentences


then copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<i><b>a)Complete the expression ( P 69 )</b></i>
 for five minutes


 since 1990


 since the summer
 for three hours
 for 10 weeks
 since Friday
 for 20 years


<i><b>b)Complete the sentences. Ues the</b></i>
<i><b>present perfect form( P 69)</b></i>


a. have lived
b. haven’t eaten
c. haven’t seen
d. has eaten
e. has worked
f. has collected
3/Production
1. have been
2. hope


3. have…lived
4. is


5. want


6. looks
7. have
8. have seen


and dicide which is the length of time
and which is starting point


+T reads out a phrase
-Sts add for or since


+Go on until sts can remember how
to use for/ since


+Let sts do exercise 3


+Call sts read full sentences


+Ask sts to do exercise 4
-Sts work in groups


+Call sts write the answer on the
board


-Sts write on the board , other correct
+Get sts to work in pairs to practice
the conversation between Ba & Tom
-Sts read in pairs


<i><b>E/.Homework</b></i>


 Have a look at Unit 8( getting started- Listen


Unit 8. Country life and city life



<i><b>Division: 5 lessons</b></i>
<b>A/.Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:
- Talk about differences between two places
- Future plans


- Write about the changes of places


<i><b>B/.Contents</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary:face, prefer, struggle , drought, facility, food, migrant</i>….
2. Grammar:


- Present progressive to talk about the future
- To describe changes with get and become
- Comparative and superative adjectives
<b>C/ Teaching aids</b>


- Stereo ,Pictures, cards ,extraboard


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 44


<i><b>Lesson 1 : Getting started </b></i>–<i><b> listen and read</b></i>



<b>A/ Objectives</b><i><b> : </b></i>


• <i>By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to talk about the city life and the</i>
countrylife


<i><b>B/.Content:</b></i>


<i>1.Vocabulary: entertainment, traffic jam, pollution, relatives , permernantly, medical</i>
facility…


<i>2.Grammar: present progressive</i>
<b>C/. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, extra boards, pictures, cards, stereo…


D/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>
<i>II/ Warm up: </i>


<i><b>* Chatting</b></i>
T: ask


1. where do you live?


2. Do you want to live in the cit y ?why?
3. Do you want to live in the country ?
why?



<i><b>* Getting started: </b></i>


- City life: noisy, tall buildings, plenty
kinds of goods, polluted air, traffic jams,
many entertainments, busy, modern…
- Country life : peaceful, fresh air, small
house/ cottage, friendly, beautiful
views…


<i>III/ New lesson </i>
<i>1. Presentation</i>


<i><b>a) Vocabulary:</b></i>
- Relatives ( n)


-Permanently(adv) vÜnh viÔn , m·i m·i
<i>eg: She wants to live here permanently</i>
-Remote ( a) xa s«i


-Medical facility ( n) cơ sở vật chất y tế
-Accesible ( a) có thể sử dụng đợc
-Definitely ( adv) rõ ràng


-Change for better (v)


<i><b>b) Grammar: </b></i>


<i><b>*The present cont with get and become</b></i>



<b>S + be+ getting/becoming + adj</b>


- Diễn tả sự việc thay đổi hoặc phát
triển.


Ss:answer the Qs


<i>using two pictures of city and country</i>


T: ask Ss look at two pictures and guess
the topic of the lesson then gets Ss to talk
anbout the city life and country life


Ss: look at two pictures and talk…


T: We have made a list of words about
the country and city. Now you look at the
dialogue in the book and listen to the tape
and find out the new words


T: play the tape


Ss: listen to the tape . underline the new
words and structure


T: explain


Ss: copy and repeat. Then make similar
sentences



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

2/. Practice


<i><b>a) Practice the dialogue in pairs</b></i>


<i><b>b) Read and answer the qs on page 73</b></i>
Key:


a. Na has been to the countryside
b. She was there for the weekend


c. The countryside is peaceful and quiet
and there is nothing to do .


d. There are no entertainments


e. Many remote areas are getting
elictricity. People can now have things
like refrigerators and TV and …


f. Ss’ answer
3/.Production


 Write five sentences about what
you like and 5 sentences about
what you hate ( don’t like)…
about the ci ty and country.


Ss: practice the dialogue in pairs. Then 1
or 2 pairs practice the dialogue before the
class ( close /open)



Ss: work individually to do the task. Then
compare the answers with their partners
T: give correct answers


Ss: work in 5 groups ( using cards)
T: go around and helps Ss


Ss: stick their cards on the board or the
wall to compare with other groups


<i>T: Both city life and country life have</i>


<i>advantages and disadvantages </i> <i> .</i>
<i>Wherever you like , the most important</i>
<i>thing is keep our environment clean, to be</i>
<i>friendly to other people, to help</i>
<i>surroundings</i>


E.Homework.



- Learn by heart new words
- Ex 4,5( Workbook)


<i><b>F.Remarks and marks</b></i>


<b>...</b>
<b>...</b>


<i><b>Date of planning :</b></i>


<i><b>Date of teaching :</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 45</b></i>


<i>Lesson 2 : Speak & Listen</i>


<i><b>A/Objectives: </b></i>


 By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to use present progressive tense to
describe changes with get and become complete the dialogue by listening


<i><b>B/ Content:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

<b>C/ Teaching aids :</b>


• Ss’ books, extra boards, pictures, cards, stereo…


D/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


* Correct forms :


1. She ( be) here since last month
2. We (learn) E for 5 years


3. Where ( you/live) since then?


<i>II/ Warm up</i>



<i><b>* Word square</b></i>


e x p e n s i b
o a m d n u v e
u b o i s v e a
i c d r t r s u
y l e t l l a t
s m r y h g t i
u o n o i s y f
b p t f d e l u


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<b>*Speak</b>


<i><b>1/. Presentation</b></i>



<i><b>* Present progressive tense</b></i>


<i><b>eg: Hoa’s grandmother is getting weaker</b></i>
*Form :


S+tobe+getting +short a.+ er
becoming


More + long a.
- Used to describe changes with get” and
<i>“become” ( Tình trạng đang tiÕn triÓn</i>



<i>hoặc thay đổi)</i>


<i><b>2/Practice</b></i>



<i><b>a) Make sentences</b></i>
a. the boys/get/tall


b. the old men/become/weak
c. It /become/dark


d. the Ss/get/good
<i><b>b) Speaking 1:</b></i>


<i>The word prompts</i>


- traffic: noisy/busy
- sky: cloudy


- houses: high/tall
- city: beautiful/modern
- trees: green/dirty


eg:- the traffic is getting busier


- there are more tall buildings and
houses


Ss: do the task
1. has been
2. have learned


3. have you lived


T: divide th class in 2 teams. Asks Ss to
go to the board and circle the word they
find


Ss: work in two teams
Key:


-modern, dirty,noisy, tall, beautiful…
<i>T: setting the scene: Hoa s grandmother</i>’


<i>is 78. Five years ago , she was 73 and she</i>
<i>was stronger than she is now.</i>


Ss: make sentences


Eg: The weather is getting colder


T: prepare some cards
Ss: make sentences
T: gives feedback


T: ask Ss to look at the two pictures on
book and talk to their partners about the
changes of the town . The words in the
box under the pictures may help Ss


Ss: work in pairs
T: give feedback



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

<i>urban (n) đô thị</i>


<i><b>urban area (n) khu đô thị</b></i>


<i><b>3/Production</b></i>



<i><b>* Speaking 2 </b></i>


<i> talk about changes in your</i>


<i>hometown</i>


<b>*Listen</b>


<i><b>*Matching </b></i>


A B
Play my homework
Do table tannis
Watch violin lesson
Go to a program
Clean to mum…
Have a meeting
Phone my aunt
speak the house
1/Pre-Listening


<i><b>*Guessing </b></i>


<i><b>2/.While – listening</b></i>




*Answer:


1. That 8. arriving
2. this 9. Thursday
3. it’s 10. late
4. where 11. afternoon
5. from 12. speak
6. coming 13. my
7. week 14. get
3/Post-Listening


<i><b>*Read the dialogue</b></i>


Ss: work in groups


T: prepares 8 cards with phrases on them
- writes 8 verbs on the board


- devices the class in to 2 teams


Ss: match with phrases beside the
suitables words


T: set the scene


<i>Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the</i>
<i>phone . She is coming to visit Lan in</i>
<i>Hanoi</i>



+Let sts guess the missing words


Ss: listen to the tape 2 times and complete
the dialogue


T: give feedback


+Let sts read the dialogue and check their
pronunciation


E.Homework

.



 write about changes in your hometown
<i><b>V/Remarks and marks</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

<i><b>Date of planning :</b></i>
<i><b>Date of teaching :</b></i>
<i><b>Period : 46</b></i>


Lesson 3: Read


<b>-A/ Objectives:</b>



 By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to understand the text about one of
the social problems


<i><b>B/ Content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: rural areas, struggle, typhoon.</i>
<i>2. Grammar: present simple tense</i>



<b>C/ Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, extra boards, pictures, cards, stereo


D/ Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’
<i><b>I/. Checking the old lesson</b></i>


- Tell the changes in your town


<i> II/Warm up</i>


<i><b>*Net work</b></i>


- Do you think many people move to live
in the city?


- What problems may arise when so
many people move to the city?


overcrowded population increase


<i>strains ( sự căng thẳng) on social services</i>


<i><b>II/ New lesson </b></i>


<i><b>1/. Pre-reading</b></i>




-Why do they want to go to the city?


<i> ( good jobs, get more money, better</i>
<i>facilities)</i>


<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


<i>- well- paying jobs (n) những công</i>


<i>việc có thu nhËp cao</i>


- typhoon (n) b·o
- fload (n) lị lơt
- drought (n) hạn hán


- overcrowding (a) quá đông đúc
- strains on (v) áp lực


- 1 student does the task
T: ask qs


Ss: answer the qs
,


Ss: play the game


+T introduces about the text <notice over
population >


-Sts answer



+T asks sts to discuss the reason
-Sts work in groups to discuss


+T takes note the main ideas and read the
text first


-Sts listen and underline vocabs
+T explains new words


-Sts repeat in choral and individual
Difficult of the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

Ex : strains on chools and hospitals
- increased pollution : « nhiƠm MTr
- live apart (v) sèng xa nhau
- human side (n) khÝa c¹nh
- migrant (n) di d©n
<i><b>b)Checking vocabs</b></i>


<i><b>-</b>Slap the board</i>


<i><b>c)Questions</b></i>


1. Are many people going to the city?
2. What do farmers do when they need
more money?


3. What happens to the families whose
parents go and live in the city?



<i><b>2/.Practice</b></i>



*Key


1. yes, they are


2. They look for other words


3. Family members have to live apart
<i><b>a) Complete the summary</b></i>


Keys:


1. leaving 6. problems
2. have 7. school
3. city 8. hospitals
4. rural 9. problem
5. city 10. world


<i>b) Find the words in the passage . . .</i>
Keys:


a. rural
b. plentful
c. increase
d. strain
e. tragedy
3/.Production



well-paying plentiful unpleasant
typhoon drought flood


destroy face create


+T gives some qs before reading
+Let sts look at the questions


T: Play the tape


Ss: listen and repeat after the tape
Ss: answer about the text


T: Now you look at the summary of the
text in ex 1 . read the text and complete
the summary by filling the missing
information


Ss: read and do. Then compare the
answers withh their partner.


T; ask Ss to read the passage again and do
ex 2 in pairs


SS: read and do in pairs
T: give correct answers
Ss: copy correct answers


T: ask Ss to play “ Noughts and crosses”
Ss: play in two teams



IV/.Homework.



- Learn by heart new words


- Read and translate the text into vietnamese.
- Ex 3,7


<i><b>V/Remarks and marks</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

<i><b>Date of planning :</b></i>
<i><b>Date of teaching :</b></i>
<i><b>Period: 47</b></i>


Lesson 4: Write


<b>-A/Objective: </b>



 By the end of the lesson ,Students will be able to write letters to their friends about
their neighbourhood


<b>B/ Content:</b>


• <i>Grammar: present simple tense</i>


<b>C/ Teaching aids :</b>


• <i><b>Students’ books, extral boards, pictures, cards, letters </b></i>

<b>D/ Teaching procedure</b>



Teaching contents Teacher and Ss’ activites



<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


-Rewrite vocabs


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


Revision: the outline of a letter
- Heading - writer’s address


- date
- dear
- opening


- body of letter
- closing


<i>II/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1. Presentation</b></i>



*Answer the Qs:
1. where do you live?


2. What does your house look like?
3. What can you se from your bed room
window?


4. How far is it from your home to
school?



5. How do you get to school?


6. What kinds of facilities are there your
neighbourhood?


7. What things in your neighbourhod do
you like best?


8. Why?


<i><b>2/.While - writing</b></i>


<b>*Suggested letter:</b>


Dear Lan


Thankt you for the letter you sent me
last week. I live in a apartment in center


Ss: 2 Students


T: aks Ss to do the task


Ss: give the outline of a letter


T: We’ve just revised the structure of an
informal letter. Today we will learn more
about informal letter by writing a letter to
a friend telling him or her about your new
neighbourhood.



Ss: work in pairs to answer the Qs
T: gives feedback


6. there is a park /a swimming pool/some
restaurants/…


7. I like the park best because …..


T: ask Ss to write letters to their friends
about their neighborhood


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

of Hanoi. It is on the fifth floor of a
building in Kimlien. It’s small with 3
rooms : a bedroom, a living room and a
kitchen. Near my house there is a park. I
often take a walk or play soccer
there.The thing I like best is the
children’s place. I go there everyday to
sing and dance…


What do you like best in your
neighbourhood? Please write to me
I’m looking forwad to hearing from you.


<i><b>Love ,</b></i>



Na


<i><b>3/.Production</b></i>




<i><b>*Correcting</b></i>


+ T: ask 1 or two Ss to read their letters
loud then correct


IV.Homework

.



- write a friendly letter to your friend about your family


<i><b>V.Remarks and marks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period : 48


<i><b>Lesson 5 : Language focus </b></i>


<b>-A/Objectives </b>


• <i>By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to</i>
practice further about comparatives and superlative of adjs


the present progressive with future meaning


<b>B/.Content</b><i><b> : </b></i>


<i>1.Vocabulary: adjectives</i>



<i>2.Grammar: - comparatives and superlatives</i>
 present progressive with future meaning


<b>C/ Teaching aids :</b>


• <i><b>Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards </b></i>


D/. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’


<i>I. Checking the old lesson</i>


<i><b>II Warm up</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

<i><b>* Brainstorming</b></i>


long adjectives


short adjectives


<i><b>III. New lesson </b></i>


<i><b>1. Presentation</b></i>



<i><b>* Comparatives </b></i>
1. with short adjs:


<b> S + be + adj + er than N(s)</b>



Eg: I’m taller than you
2.with long adjs


<b>S + be + more + long adj + than + N(s)</b>


Eg: the life in the city is more
comfortable than the life in the country
<i><b>* superlative</b></i>


1. with short adjs:


<b>S + be + the + adj + est</b>


Eg: He is the tallest in my class
2.with long adjs


<b>S + be + the +most + long adj </b>


Eg:My mother is the most beautiful
woman in my mind


Note:


Good - better - the best
Bad - worse - the worst


Many/much - more - the most
Little - less - the least



<i><b>2/Practice</b></i>



<i><b>a) complete the language focus 4 ( P79)</b></i>
Keys:


- The air in the country is cleaner than in
the city


- The food in the country is fresher than
in the city


- The medical facilities in the city is
more accessible than in the coutry


<i><b>b)Make sentences (p.79)</b></i>


- What are advertised ? ( an apartment,
avilla and a house)


- How are they?


- How much do we pay per month?
Ex:


- The villa is the most expensive
- The apartment is the cheapest


T: aks Ss to find out short Adj and long
adj they have learnt in two teams



Ss: one of each group goes to the
blackboard write. The others of each
group help.


T: remind Ss the forms of comparatives
and superlatives


Ss: Listen- repeat- make sentences then
copy


Eg: she is the best student in my class


+Let sts take note some irregular adj


Ss: work in pairs to make sentences


Ss: look at the pictures and work in pairs
to compare


T:draw the chart on the board
Eg: group 1


- The villa is older than the apartment
- the house is more expensive than the
apartment


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

- The house is bigger than the apartment


<i><b>c) Complete the dialogue ( Ex 2- P.78)</b></i>
* key:



a. am playing
b. are doing
c. am watching
d. am going
e. are cleaning
f. am having


<b>*The present progressive </b>
- Be + Ving


<i>- used to talk about the plan in the</i>


<i>future</i>


<i><b>d)Making dialogue</b></i>


<i>- Shipping information: thông tin về giờ</i>


<i>tàu chạy</i>


- destination


<i>- Time of departure: giờ tàu chạy</i>
- status:


<i>- revised time : gi đc thay đổi lại</i>
<i>- origin:điểm xuất phát</i>


Ex 1:



S1: Is the boat to Qui Nhon leaving at
11.30?


S2: Is that Good fortune?
S1: That’s right


S2: I’m very sorry. It has been delayed
S1: Oh .No


S2: Now , it’s leaving at 13.55


3/.Production


Play noughts and crosses



old expensive big
expensive small hot
big beuatiful old


+T gives feed back and correct


+Let sts do exercise then ask sts some qs


<i>- what tense do we use in 6 dialogues?</i>
<i>- tell me the form?</i>


T: ask Ss to do the Ex 1 on page 77
Ss: read the dialogue in pairs



T: give them the shipping information and
ask them to make similar dialogue


Ss: work in 8 groups


Ss: can make more sentences. The team
which has 3 N or 3 C on a line will win
the game.


<i>IV.Homework</i>



- revise for the first term test


<i>V.Remarks and marks</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

Unit 9 . A first - aid course



* Division: 5 lessons


<b>A.Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:


- Describe the character and particular trait (đặc điểm)


- Introduce people and how to answer when they are introduced.
<b>B.Teaching contents</b>


<i>1. Vocabulary: - Adjectives of character.</i>
- seem, enough



2. Grammar:


- Simple present


- Simple present to talk about general truths
- (Not) adi + enough to do smth


<b>C.</b> <b>Teaching aids</b>


- Stereo,Pictures, cards,Small board


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 54</b>


Lesson 1



Getting started – Listen and read



<i><b>A.</b></i> <i><b>Objective: </b></i>


 By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know what they would do in the
situations which require first - aid


<i><b>B.</b></i> <i><b>Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: ambulance, emerency, concious, bleed…</i>
<i>2. Grammar: - Future simple, Modal Will…</i>



C. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
<i><b>I/ Warm up</b></i>


*Kim’ s game.
Key:


1, Emergency room 2, Sterile dressing
3, medicated oil 4, ice


5, water pack 6, alcohol


- A girl has a burn on her arm, we should
use the ice to ease the pain


- …


<i><b>II/ New lesson </b></i>


- T. asks Ss to open the books and look at
the things P.80 (for 20’’)


- Ss work in Two groups
- Ss write them on the board


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

1, Pre - Reading
<i><b>a, Vocabulary</b></i>


- Ambulance (n) xe cøu th¬ng


- Concious (Adj) tØnh t¸o ><


unconcious


- Bleed (v) - bled chảy máu
- Receive( v) nhận


- Wound (n) vết thơng


- Pressure (n) áp lực , sức Ðp
- First-aid (n) cøu th¬ng


- Emergency (n) trêng hỵp cÊp
cøu


<i>*Slap the board:</i>


<i><b>b, Gap - fill</b></i>


<i> There was an emergency at Lan s</i>’


<i>school. A student __(1)__off her bike</i>
<i>and hit her head on the road. She was</i>
<i>__(2)__, but she cut her head and the</i>
<i>__(3)__ was __(4)__badly. Lan</i>
<i>telephoned Bach Mai hospital and asked</i>
<i>a nurse to send an __(5)__ to Quang</i>
<i>Trung school. Lan was asked to keep te</i>
<i>student __(6)__ while waiting for the</i>
<i>anbulance.</i>



2, While - Reading


<i><b>*Practice the dialogue with a partner</b></i>
*Answer:


1. fell 2. concious
3. cut 4. bleeding
5. ambulance 6. awake
* Select the topic:


- A, B, C, E, F


<i><b>3, Post - Reading</b></i>


<i><b>* Write it up</b></i>


“Yesterday there was an emergency at..”


- T. takes notes on the board . Then asks
Ss to look at the pictures on page 10.
- Checking


- Write the new word over the board. And
call two Ss to slap the board


- T. hangs the chart with the paragraph on
the board


- Ask Ss to predict the words in the gaps.



- T. plays tape and asks Ss to listen and
check their prediction


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and
select the topics covered in the dialogue.
- Ss write the answer


- Have Ss in turning play the roles to
demonstrate from the dialogue


- T. calls on some pairs to read in front of
the class.


+Ask sts to write a story using the
information from the dialogue


-Sts write


+Call sts read their story


E,Homework.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

<i>F, Marks and Remarks</i>



...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 55</b>



Unit 9 . a first - aid course



Lesson 2 :Speak + Listen



<i><b>A. Objective:</b></i>


• By the end of the leson, Students will be able to make and respond to
requests, offers anf promises and listen to a paragraph for details about the activities
taking place in an emergency room.


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: to make arequest, to make an offer, to make a promise</i>


 eye chart, wheelchair, stretcher, crutches, parademic, check one’s eye sight,
lean against …


2. Grammar:


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’
<i><b>I/ Checking the old lesson</b></i>


- 2 Ss practice the dialogue before the


class


<i><b>II/ Warm up</b></i>


<i><b>*Revision: Network</b></i>


<i> have a snake bite</i>


<i><b>III/ New lesson </b></i>
<b>1.Speak</b>


<i><b>a, Pre – Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>+)Vocabs</b></i>


- Bandage (n) Băng
- Bike (v) cắn
- Bee (n) con ong
- Sting (v) đốt


Ss:


* Possible answers
- have a nose bleed
- have a burn


- have a cut


- have a bee sting…
- T. Asks some qs


- Ss Answer the Qs


1. Will you please get me a bandage?
2. Would you like to come to my party?
3. I promise I’ll finish my homework
before bedtime?


- T: gets Ss to work out the rules for
themselves by asking qs


- after formulating the modd sentences,
elicit some more phrases with the same
use from Ss.


- Ss work in pairs, listen , review + copy
situations


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<i><b>+) Questions:</b></i>


1. I want you to get me a bandage. How
can I say?


2. I’d like you to come to my party. How
can I say?


3. I tell my mother that I’ll surely finish
my work before bedtime. How can I
say?


* Concept chÑcking:


<i><b>1. To make a request :</b></i>


Will/ could/ can + you (please) + V…..?


<i>* Respones:</i>


+ Sure/ Ok/ All right


- I’m sorry I can’t / I’m afraid not
<i><b>2. To make an offer:</b></i>


Will/ won’t you / shall I/ Can I + V …?
Would you like + to V…?


What can I do/get for you?
<i>* Respones</i>


+ Yes, please / That would be nice
- No, thank you


<i><b>3. To make a promise</b></i>


I promise I’ll/ I won’t + V…?
I will……..I promise


I promise to……….
<i>* Respones :</i>


+ I hope so/ Good/ I’m glad/ don’t forget



<i><b>b, While - Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>* Matching : </b></i>


a. The girl has a cau on her hand
b The girl has a bad fever


c. The boy has just broken the vase
d. The boy has a headache


e. The boy has a snake bite


* Picture drill: Identtify the situations in
the pictures:


Picture a: request
--- b: offer/ request
--- c: offer/request
--- d: offer


--- e: promise


<i><b>C, Post – Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>*Work in groups</b></i>
<b>2.Listen</b>


a )Pre - Listening
<i><b>+)Vocabulary</b></i>



- eye chart (n) máy đo thị lực
- stretcher (n) c¸ng


- crutcher (n) cái nạng
- scale (n) cái cân


- Ask Ss to look at the pictures on page 82
and match the situations with the
statements


- Ss work in pairs
- T calls on some pairs


Key: 1 - a ; 2 - d ; 3 - e; 4 - b; 5 - c


- T. asks Ss to work individually


- Ss deamonstrate the exchanges picture b
with the teacher , then listen and repeat.
- T. gets 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate the
exchanges of the rest (c, d, e)


- T. gets Ss in turns to practice all the
exchanges (a- e). Then monitor, correct,
encourage Ss to make sentences for
themselves.


Ss: work in closed and open pairs


+Let sts work in group to ask about their


situations


T. uses some pictures and introduces new
words


- Ss look at the pictures, listen and guess
the meaning of the words. Then copy
- T. asks some Qs with what or where…
Eg: where is the scale?


- The scale is …………


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

- wheelchair ( n) xe lăn
<i><b>+) Matching ( Ex -P 82 )</b></i>
Key:


A: ambulance D. eye chart
B. wheelchair E. scale
C. crutches F. stretcher


<i><b>b) While- Listening</b></i>


<i><b>* Ordering prediction</b></i>



<b>Things</b> <b>you guess</b> <b>you hear</b>


ambulance 3


wheelchair 2


crutches 6



eye chart 4


scale 5


<i><b>* True /false statements</b></i>


a. A doctor is wheeling a patient into the
emergency room.


b. The patient’s head is bandaged


c. A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a
patient sitting on it.


d. The eye chart consists of 28 letters
arranging in the different size


e. The baby’s mother is trying to stop the
nurse from weighing her baby.


Key:


a. F -> ( a paradic not a doctor)
b. True


c. F -> (empty wheelchair not with a
patient)


d. T



e. F -> (stop her baby from crying)

<i><b>c), Post - Reading</b></i>


<i><b>* Write it up:</b></i>


<i>Beginning with : This is emergency </i>“


<i>room in a large hospital...”</i>


E to the correct words in the box .
- Ss work in groups


- T. asks Ss to rub out the letter (A, B) but
leave the words.


- Ask Ss to listen to a paragraph about the
ativities taking place in an emergency
room which contains the words on the
board


- Ss copy the table and guess the order of
the words


- T. plays the tape (3 times) and asks Ss to
listen


- Ss give their answers


- T. corrects by play the tape once
sentence by sentence.



- T. asks Ss to read the statements
carefully and check if they understand the
meaning of the statements . and asks Ss to
work in pairs to decide which of the
sentences is true and which is false


- Ss listen to the tape twice


- T. asks Ss listen to the tape once again
sentence by sentence


- Ss write individually


- write the story about the activities in the
picture , using the present continuos
tense


D

, Homework

.



 Do ex 4 in the workbook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 56</b>


Unit 9 . a first - aid course



Lesson 3: Read




<b>A. Objective</b>


• <i>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use “ so as to/ in order to”and</i>
understand the content of the text.


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: lye flat, elevate, victim, overheat, tissue damage, ease…</i>
<i>2. Structure : so as to / in order to + V-inf</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>
<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Bingo:</b></i>


Burn, cut, bee sting, snake bite, fainting,
shock


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Reading</b></i>




* Draw the network with some examples
on the board.


fainting


Burn


(cool the burn with ice) shock
<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- lie flat (v) n»m th¼ng


- elevate (v) # lower (v) nâng lên
- victim (n) a person who needs first-aid
- overheat (v) ( make smth too hot)
- minimize (v) giảm đến mức tối thiểu
-sterile (n) vô trùng


Ss: whole class


T: asks Ss to give nouns for emergency
which requires first-aid and write them
on the board


- have Ss choose any 4 words on the
borad and write them down on a piece of
paper.


- Call out the words until some one has


ticked all the four words and shouts”
Bingo !”


- Ss work individually.


- T asks Ss to think of what to do in these
emergency cases


- Ss play network to think of what to do
- T. collects and writes the Ss’ ideas on the
board


-T. asks Ss to open their books and read
the instructions on page 83


- Ss listen , repeat and then copy


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

<i><b>b)Rub out and remember</b></i>


<i><b>2, While - Reading</b></i>


<i><b>a) Matching</b></i>



<b>Key: A ( a,c,e); B: b ; C:d</b>



<i>b) Grid</i>


cases do

leave the

don't do


patient lying


flat



force him or
her to stand or


sit


fainting


shock



<b>* Form:</b>



<i><b>So as to/ in order to + V</b></i>

<i><b>(để…….)</b></i>



* Ex 1 . Language focus


<i>Key:</i>


1 - f; 2 - c; 3 - b; 4 - e; 5 - a; 6 - d


<i><b>3, Post - Reading</b></i>


* Recall How first-aid


Fainting
Shock
Burn


them.


- Ss work in pairs



- T checks and then corrects


- T. draws a grid on the board . Asks Ss to
read the instructions again and fill in the
information


- Ss work in pairs


- T. calls on some pairs to write their
answers


- T. asks Ss some qs:


<i>+ why should you/ we cool the burn</i>


<i>immediately ?</i>


<i>+ We should do it so as to minimize the</i>
<i>tissue damage</i>


- Ss listen and give the form
- Ss work in groups


- T. gives correct answer


E

/ Homework

.



 Do ex 2,3 in the workbook



<i><b>F/ Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

<b>Period 57</b>


Unit 9 . A first - aid course



Lesson 4 : Write



<i><b>A. Objective:</b></i>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a thank - you note.


<i><b>B.Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: thank smb for sth, to cheer smb up, come over…</i>
<i>2. Grammar: simple future </i>


<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>



-Recall the first-aid


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


*Chatting


<i>-Do you always write and receive </i>
<i>thank-you notes ?</i>


<i>-On which occassion ?</i>


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Writing</b></i>



<i><b>a)Vocabulary</b></i>


- to thank smb for smth


eg: She thanked me for helping her
- to cheer smb up (v) to make Smb
happier


- come over (v)


<i><b>b)Complete the letter on page 84</b></i>
1.was 4. came


2. were 5. am



3.helped 6. ‘ll telephone
<i><b>c) True /false</b></i>


1. Nga wrote to thank Hoa for some
candy


2. Hoa’s gift cheered Nga up


3. Nga’d like Hoa to see her at the
hospital


4. Nga is very bored at home


5. Nga wrote the letter at the hospital


<i><b>2, While - Writing</b></i>



<i><b>* Questions (on page 85) on</b></i>



-3sts


-Sts anwer the questions
- Ss work in two groups


- T: (sets the scence) Nga was sick and
she had to go to hospital . After she left
the hospital , she wrote a thank you - note
to Hoa. Why and what did she write?
- Ss listen and answer the question. Then
complete the letter on page 84 in pairs


- T. asks Ss to guess, then let them read
the letter


- Ss guess , then read the completed letter
individually


- T. gives the correct answers
1. F 3.F 4.T
2. T 5.F


- T. tells Ss they are going to write a thank
- you note to a friend and invite him/ her
to go on a picnic with them.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

<i><b>small board</b></i>



1. What did your friends give/ send you?
- She/ He gave/ sent me flowers….
2. On what occasion?


- on my birthday


………
<i><b>* Write a letter </b></i>


<i><b>Dear...,</b></i>



<i><b>3, Post - Writing</b></i>



<i><b>*Correcting</b></i>



- Ss write the letter in the notebook


- Ss work individually to write their won
letter.


+Call some sts to read their writing+T
gives feed back


E, Homework

.



 Do ex 4,5 in the workbook
<i><b>E.</b></i> <i><b>Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 58</b>


Unit 9 . A first - aid course



Lesson 5 :Language focus



<b>A. Objective</b><i><b> : </b></i>


• By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to review future simple


<i><b>B.Teaching content:</b></i>



<i>Grammar: future simple, “will” with requests</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Students activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- Read your letters aloud


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


*Chatting
- How are you ?


- Why did we wear warm clothes ?
- Why should we learn E . . . ?


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1.Presentation</b></i>



- Ss: (1 or 2) do the task
-Sts answer



- T. asks Ss to tell the form and the use of
future simple


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

<b>a) Future simple tense</b>


* Form and use


+ S + will/ shall + V…..
Exercise 2:


<i><b> Use the correct form of will and </b></i>“ ”
<i><b>shall</b></i>


“ ”


Key: 1.will 4.shall
2. will 5. will
3.won’t 6. will
<i><b>b)Modal will </b></i>“ ”


<i>* To make requests</i>


will/ would


you (please) + V…?
can/ could


<i>- Respones:</i>


Sure/ Ok/ All right



I’m sorry I can’t/ I’m afraid not


<i>* To make an offer</i>


- will/won’t you + V…?
- Shall I + V….?


- Can I + V….?


( Won’t you + V…?: để đa ra lời yêu cầu
khẩn thiết hoặc lời nói yêu cầu)


- Respones:


Yes, please/ That would be nice
No, thank you


<i>* To make a promise</i>


I pomise I’ll………..
I will……I promise
I promise to ……….
- Respones:


I hope so
Good/I’m glad
Don’t forget
2.Practice


<i><b>Exercise 3: Complete the dialogues by</b></i>


<i><b>using “will”</b></i>


Key:


a. will you give it …..


b. will you answer the telephone ,
please?


d. will you turn on the Tv?


e. will you pour a glass of water?
f. will you get me a cushion


<b>Exercise 4: </b>


a. will you empty the garbage can ,
please?


b. will you paint the door , please?
d. will you study harder ?


- Ss work in pairs
- T. gives feedback


- Ss pracise the completed dialogue in
pairs


- T. asks



- Ss tell the form and the use


- T. asks Ss to practise in pairs
- Ss practise in pairs


- Ss work in pairs asking and answering
- T. corrects pronunciation


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

e. Shall I carry the basket?


E/ Homework

.



 Have a look at getting started and listen and read of Unit 10
<i><b>F.</b></i> <i><b>Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


<b>Date of planning :</b>
Date of teaching :


Unit 10 . Recycling



* Division: 5 lessons


<b>A.Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:
- Give request (formal and informal)
- Relate some past or present happenings.


- Write a set of instructions


<i><b>B.Teaching contents</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary:(v) decompose , recycle , reduce , refill , reuse , protect , contact (n) </i>
natural resource , compost , deposit , . . .


2. Grammar:


 ed and - ing participle
 Do you mind ……..


<i><b>C. Teaching aids</b></i>


- Stereo , Pictures, cards , Small board


<b>D.</b> <b>Teaching procedure</b>


<i>Period 59</i>


<i><b>Lesson 1: Getting started </b></i>–<i><b> listen and read</b></i>
A. Objective:


<b> By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to do Smth to protect the environment </b>
and save natural resources


B. Teaching contents:


<i>1. Vocabulary: representative, protect, natural resources, recycle, contact…</i>
<i>2. Grammar: - Adj + to +V</i>



C. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>
<i>II/ Warm up</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

<i><b>* Brainstorming</b></i>


Reuse plastic bags


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1, Presentation
<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- representative (n) Đại diện
- recycle (v) t¸i chÕ
- reduce (v) gi¶m
- reuse (v) t¸i sư dơng


- overpackage (a.) đợc gói quá nhiều
- packaging (n) bao bì đóng gói
<i><b> *Jumble words</b></i>


- tconatc
-


<i><b>b) True/ false predictions :</b></i>



a. Friends of the Earth is an organization
to help people make friends with each
other


b. Miss Blake asks Ss to remember 3
things: reduce, reuse, recycle


c. Reduce means buying the products
which are overpackaged


d. We can not reuse things likes
envelopes, glass, plastic bottles, old
paper …


e. Recycling means not just throwing
things away but trying and finding
another use for them.


<i>2/Practice</i>


<i><b>a)Practice the dialogue with a partner</b></i>
<i><b>b) True/ false:</b></i>


a. F d. F
b. T e. T
c. F f. T
<i><b>c) Questions ( P.89)</b></i>
Answer key:



a. reduce means not buying products
which are overpacked


b. We can reuse things like envelopes ,
glass, plastic bottles and old plastic
bags.


c. Recycle means not just throwing
things away . try and find another use
for them.


d. We can look for information on
recycling things by having contact with
an organization like Friends of the Earth,
going to the local library or asking your


- Ss work in 4 groups


(use cloth bags, use tree leaves to
wrap things, make garbage into
fertilizer.….)


- Ss listen to the teacher and copy
new words , then repeat them


- Ss guess before reading. Then read
the text silently


- Ss work in pairs to decide if the
statements are T/F



T: asks Ss to look at the Qs on page
90 in pairs


Ss: read the text individually and do
the task


- Ask sts to read the dialogue in pairs
+Call some pairs to check sts’
understanding


- Ask Ss to read the text and check T/
F statements


- Ss work in pairs, ask and answer
the questions.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

family and friends.
e. Ss’ answer


<i><b>3, Production</b></i>


<i><b>* Discussion :</b></i>


- Write the topic on the board
“ How to protect our environment”


- T. asks Ss to express their
opinions/ideas on this topic


- Ss write their ideas



E/ Sum up



<i> How to reuse, redure and recycle </i>


<i>F/ Homework.</i>


 Learn by heart new words


 read and translate the dialoue into Vietnamese


<i><b>G/ Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...


...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 60


Unit 10 . Recycling



Lesson 2 : Speak

<b> + </b>

Listen



<i><b>A. Objective:</b></i>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice more about giving
and responding to instructions . Listen for specific information about making compost.


<i><b>B.Teaching contents:</b></i>



<i>1. Vocabulary: fertilizer, compost, farbric, leather </i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- 2 Ss practice the dialogue before the
class.


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Kim’s game:</b></i>


Possible answers


- used paper, old newspaper, books,
boxes, bottles, glasses , jars, plastic
bags…


<i>III/ New lesson </i>



- Ss do the task in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

<i><b>1,Speak</b></i>



<i><b>a) Pre - Speaking</b></i>


<i><b>*Vocabulary:</b></i>


- Fertilizer (n) ph©n bãn


- Compost (n) phân xanh, hữu cơ
- Faric (n) hàng vải sợi


- Leather (n) hµng da
<i><b>*What and Where:</b></i>


<i><b>* Arrange the words or phrases into</b></i>
<i><b>the right column</b></i>


<i><b>b) While – Speaking</b></i>


<i><b>*Mapped dialogue:</b></i>


1. Which group do clothes belong to?
2. What can we do with those clothes?


<i><b>c) Post - Speaking</b></i>



<i>* Free - Practice</i>


<b>2.Listen</b>


<i><b>* Chatting:</b></i>


- What can we do with “Vegetable matter”?


<i>- How can we make compost? </i>
a,Pre – Listening


<i><b>* Vocabulary:</b></i>


- Grain (n) h¹t


- T. presents the vocabulary.


- Checking


T: You have named the items in the
picture, now you work in pairs and
decide which group each item
belongs to


(Paper, glass, plastic, metal,
vegetable matter, fabric, leather)
Ss: work in pairs to do the task by
using some Qs:


- T. puts the mapped dialogue on the
board


- Ask Ss to practice exchange in
pairs.



- Then replacing the informations
with the words in the dictation list.
- Ss have free practice about “3 –
RE”


- T. asks some questions.
- Ss answer.


- T. presents the vocabulary.
- Ss practice.


- Checking


- Ask Ss to work in groups


- Complete the grid, filling the
informations


Groups


Paper paper, old newspapers, books,
cardboard boxes…


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

- Shade (n) bóng dâm
- Moisture (n) hơi ẩm


- Condensation (n) sự ngng tô
<i><b>*Rub out and remember:</b></i>



<i><b>*, Grid:</b></i>


<i><b>b, While – Listening</b></i>


<i><b>* Grid:</b></i>


Key:


a) A – All vegetable matter


b) B – A place get no sun and shade
c) A - No


d) B – Six months


<i><b>c, Post - Listening</b></i>



<i>* Questions:</i>


a. Why don’t we use any meat or grain
to make compost ?


b. Why don’t we turn the compost
regularly ?


c. Does the compost need moisture ?


- T: you are going to listen to an
expert talking about the way to make
compost. First, you look at the


questions and have a guess of the
information in the tape


- Ss guess, then listen to the tape
twice. then compare the answer with
the other


- Ss listen again and answer the
questions


- Call them to give out.
- T. give some questions.
- Ss


E

, Sum up



<i> How to recycle things ,- How to make compost </i>


<i><b>F, Homework- Do exercises.</b></i>


Date of planning :


Date of teaching :
<b>Period 61</b>


Unit 10 : Recycling



Lesson 3 : Read



Questions Compost



What type of garbage …?
Where …?


How long ?


Questions Compost


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<i><b>A. Objective:</b></i>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to form the Passive in Present simple,
by reading the details


<i><b>B.Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: tire, pipe, deposit, refill, melt…</i>
<i>2. Grammar: present simple in passive</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• S tudents’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<b> </b>


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>



- Write the way to make compost.


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b> *Wordsquare:</b></i>


n b c g a r b
v e d r d o p
e j u e y i l
l u s e d p a
o s t n o t s
p r o t e c t
e a b r c a i
r e c e e n c
d e e e f g h


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Reading</b></i>



<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- pipe (n) ống nớc


- floor covering (n) Thảm trải nhà
- milkman (n)


- refill (v) Đổ đầy lại


- industry (n)


- glassware (n)
- law (n)


- deposit (n) Tiền đặt cọc
- return (v)


- dung (n) Ph©n


<i>* Rub out and remember</i>
<i><b>b) Pre </b></i>–<i><b> Questions</b></i>:


1. What do you often do with used
things? ( car tires, milk bottles, glass…)
2. What can they make from them?


- Ss work in groups of four


Key:  environment, garbage, pure,
used, protect,


 envelope, dust, green tree, can,
plastic, paper bag, reduce, reuse,
recycle


- T. asks Ss to read and find new
words


- Ss practice



- Checking


- T. asks Ss some qs:


- Ss answer the qs given


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

<i><b>c) Make a list of recycling</b></i>



facts



<i><b>* Present simple in passive</b></i>


<b>eg: - Milk bottles are cleaned and refilled</b>
<b>- Glass is broken up, melted and made</b>
into new glassware.


<b>Form: S + am/is/are + V- ed (II)</b>

<i><b>2, While - Reading</b></i>



<i><b>a) Grid:</b></i>


1. are recycle to make pipes and floor
recoverings.


2. are cleaned and refilled


3. is broken up, melted and made into
new glassware.



4. are brought back for recycling
5. is made into compost.


<i><b>b) Questions (Page 93 ) </b></i>


Answer key:


a. clean them and refill them with milk
b. The glass is broken up, melted and
made into new glassware


c. Made a new law. There must be a
deposit on all drink cans…


d. is made from household and garden
waste.


<i><b>3, Post - Reading</b></i>


* Exercise 1 (P.95):


<i>Complete the recycling instructions use the</i>
<i>verbs given:</i>


- dip, blow, wash, mix, dry, break, use,
melt


<b> First, (1)_ the glass into small</b>
<b>pieces. Then (2) the glass with a</b>
<b>detergent liquid. Next (3)_ the glass</b>



<i><b>pieces completely, (4) them with a</b></i>
<b>certain specific chemicals. After that</b>


<b>(5)_ the mixture antil it becomes a</b>


some recycling facts to protect the
environment.


- Ss find the form. Then make
sentences


- T. presents the model sentences and
give the form.


- T. asks Ss the text in pairs to make a
list of recycling facts mentioned in
the text


- Ss work in pairs


- T. checks and then corrects


- T. asks Ss to read and answer the Qs
- Ss work in pairs


- T. calls on some pairs to ask and
answer


Ss: work in groups
T: gives correct answer


Used things Recycling facts


1. Car tires
2. milk bottles
3. Glass


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

<i><b>liquid . Finally, (6) a long pipe , (7) it</b></i>
<i><b>into the liquid, then (8) the liquid into</b></i>


<b>intended shapes.</b>


<i>Key:</i>


1. break 2. wash
3. dry 4. mix
5. melt 6. use
7. dip 8. blow


E

, Sum up



- Passive in present simple
- How to recyling


<i>F, Homework.</i>


 Do ex 2,3 in the workbook
 Learn by heart new words


 Read and translate all the text into Vienamese



<i><b>G/ Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :


Date of teaching :
<b>Period 62</b>


Unit 10 : Recycling



Lesson 4 : Write



<i><b>A. Objective:</b></i>


• By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to write a set of instructions on how to
recycle used things


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: soak, mash, wire mesh, bucket…</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>



- Tell smth can be recycled


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b> Play lucky numbers: </b></i>
- Write number on the board from 1 to 9
- Each correct sentences is 2 points.


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Writing</b></i>



<i><b>* Vocabulary</b></i>


<i><b>- soak (v) nhóng ít</b></i>



- bucket (n) cái xô
- mash (v) trén, nghiÒn
- mesh (v) trén


- wire mesh (n) líi
- mix ( v)


- firmly (adv) m¹nh
- scatter (v) rải , rắc


- tray (n) cái khay , mâm
<i><b>*Ordering prediction:</b></i>



Key


1.soak 2. mash
3. mix 4. pull out
5. press 6. dry


<i><b>2, While - Writing</b></i>


<i><b>key: </b></i>



a. First , take the used tea leaves from
the teapot


b. Next, scatter the tea leaves on a tray
c. Then , dry the leaves in the sun


d. Finally , put the dry leaves in a pot for
future use.


- Call on one or two Ss to do the task
- Ss work in two teams


- Each time 1 student choose a
number and T. read aloud the
sentence


+ Lucky numbers: 1, 4, 5


2. say this sentence in the passive:
“people speak E everywhere”



3. say this sentence in the active: “
Cartoons are made for children”
6. Say this sentence in the passive: “
We do not use things carefully”
7. say this sentence in the passive: “
Mr Pike teaches Maths”


8. say this sentence in the
passive:”Vegetarians do not eat
meat”


- T. presents some new words.
- Ss repeat in chorus


- Read them individually


- T. asks Ss to work in groups to
guess the order of the actions


- call on some Ss to write out the
answer on the board


- T: In some areas, people burn dry
tea leaves to keep mosquitoes away .
Make the directions on how to
prepare the tea leaves by using the
pictures and given words in the box
- Ss work in pairs. Then read aloud
- T corects and gives feedback



- T. asks Ss to tell beginning with


<i>first, then, next, after that, finally</i>


“ ”


- Ss close all their books and do
individually ( 2 or 3)


Dry Pull out mash


soak mix press


1 2 3 4


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

<i><b>3, Post - Writing</b></i>



<i><b>* Recall how to prepare the tea leaves</b></i>
<i><b>by using the pictures </b></i>


E, Homework

.



- learn by heart way of recycling paper and tea leaves


<i><b>F, Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :



Date of teaching :
<b>Period 63</b>


Unit 10 : Recycling



Lesson 5 : Language focus



<i><b>A. Objective:</b></i>


• By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to practice the passive with present
simple and future simple , structures with Adjectives.


<i><b>B.Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: V - ed(II), Adjs</i>


<i>2. Grammar: future simple and present in passive</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- Tell the way of recycling tea leaves



<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b> * Play palmanism</b></i>


- Ss call 1 or 2 Ss to do the task
-Ss play in 2 groups


1. Take a. eaten


2. bring b. dried


3. eat c. mixed


4. break d. melted


5. dry e. broken


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1.Presentation


a)Passive Be + V- ed

( II)
<i>1. Present simple</i>


S + am/is/are + Ved(II)
<i>2. Future simple</i>


S + will be + Ved(II)
<i><b>* Change active to passive</b></i>



Eg: - They take the dog to the park
The dog is taken to the park
+)Note


<i>1. Tân ngữ của câu chủ động sang làm</i>


<i>chủ ngữ của câu bị động</i>


<i>2. Chia to be cho phù hợp với thì và chủ</i>
<i>ngữ của câu</i>


<i>3. Viết động từ cử câu chủ động ở dạng</i>
<i>QK phân từ</i>


<i>4. Chuyển chủ ngữ của câu chủ động</i>
<i>sang tân ngữ và đặt sau by</i>“ ”


* Exercise 1:
Answer key:


a. The glass is broken into small pieces
b. Then the glass is washed with a
detergent liquid


c. The glass pieces ar dried completely.


d. They are mixed wiuth certain specific
chemicals



e. The mixture is melted until it
becomes a liquid.


<i>* Exercise 2: Complete the dialogue</i>
Key:


1. will be shown
2. will….be built
3. will be finished
4. will be made
<i><b>* It s adj</b><b>’</b></i> <i><b>…</b><b>.</b></i>


Eg: - It’s happy to meet our friends
- It’s interesting to read books


<b>Form: It s + adj + to + V</b>’
Exercise 3 (P. 96)


Key: 1. Easy to understand
2. hard to believe
3. dangerous to go


- T. asks Ss to tell the form and the
use of future simple and present
passive


- Ss tell the form and make
sentences


Eg: - English is spoken all over the


wold


- Truyen Kieu is read by many
people in VN


- The work will be finished
tomorrow


- T. gives examples


- Ss listen and find the way to change
active to passive


- T. asks Ss to read the instructions
on how to recycle glass and rewrite
the sentences in passive form.


- Ss work in pairs . Then read
completed aloud


- T: Asks Ss to complete the dialogue
between Dr Kim and Hai, using the
correct form of the verbs in blankets
- Ss: work in pairs to complete the
dialogue. Then practice in pairs


T: explains the structure then asks Ss
to work in pairs to complete the letter
on page 07



-Ss do ex 3 . then read aloud


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

4. important to wait
<b>* Adj + that + clause</b>


Eg: I’m pleased that you want to know
more


2.Practice
<i>*Matching </i>


1. Relieved a. chóc mõng
2. Congratution b. tr«ng chê
3.Look for ward to c. xác nhận lại
4. Confirm d.nhÑ nhâm
1. d 2. a 3. b 4. c
<i><b>*Complete the letter</b></i>


Key: 1. was happy
2. am relieved
3. is afraid
4. are…sure
5. am certain


+Let sts do the matching then
complete the letter


+Call sts to read aloud the letter
+T gives feedback and corret sts’
pronunciation



E

, Homework

.



 Have a look at getting started and listen and read of Unit 11


<i><b>F, Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


<b>Date of planning :</b>
<b>Date of teaching : </b>


Unit 11 . Traveling around vietnam



* Division: 5 lessons


<b>A.Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:


- Give request and reply (formal and informal)
- Relate some past or present happenings.
- Relate some happenings ( narrative writings)
<b>B.Teaching contents</b>


<i>1. Vocabulary:, import, recognize, ...</i>
<i>2. Grammar: Making requets with</i>


- Would / Do you mind if I . . . ?


 Would / Do you mind + V-ing……..?


- ed and -ing participles
<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Stereo ,Pictures, cards ,Small board


Period 64


<i><b>Lesson 1:Getting started </b></i>–<i><b> listen and read</b></i>
A. Objective:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

B. Teaching content:


<i>1. Vocabulary: crop, sugar cane, water buffalo, fourty-minute drive…</i>
<i>2. Grammar: some expression to express their interest</i>


C. Teaching aids<i><b> :</b></i>


<i><b>• </b><b> Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…</b></i>


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>



<i><b>* Jumble words:</b></i>


Key: Ngo mon gate, Halong bay, the
temple of literature, Nha Rong harbor
<i><b>* Getting started</b></i>


1 – Pic c 2 – Pic a
3 – Pic d 4 – Pic b


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1.Presentation
<i><b>a)Vocabulary</b></i>


- Crop (n) (Smth such as grain, rice,
fruit…is grown in one season)


- sugar cane (n) picture
- water buffalo (n) picture


- A forty - minute drive = The drive
<i>takes 40 minutes: chuyến đi dài 40</i>
- Would you mind if I took a photo?
- Would you mind sitting in the front
seat of the taxi?


<i><b>b) Pre - Questions:</b></i>


1. Where does Hoa meet the Jones?


2. Is it the first time the Jones have
visited Vietnam?


3. How do they travel to Hanoi?


4. What do they see along the road to
Hanoi?


5. What would Jim like to do?
2, Practice


<i><b>a,Practice the dialogue in groups</b></i>


- T. asks Ss to play in four groups to
connect the words to make the right
phrases for places of interest and
write them on the board as fast as
possible


- Ss work in 4 groups


- T. asks Ss to match the names with
the right pictures individually


- Ss do the task individually


- T. introduces the topic and sets the
scene.


- T. presents vocabulary



Eg: the vacation lasted three months
- It a three -month vacation


Form:


<i><b> Would you mind + Ving?</b></i>


<i><b>Would you mind if I + Ved (past</b></i>
<i><b>simple form) ?</b></i>


- T. plays the tape and asks Ss listen
and repeat after tape. Then practice
in pairs and answer the qs


- T. calls on some groups to read in
front of the class.


- Ss work in groups, tick T/ F
harbor bay


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

<i><b>b, True/false:</b></i>
a. True


b. True


c. False -> In a taxi
d. True


e. True



f. False -> Not only rice and corn but
also sugar


<i><b>3.Production</b></i>



<i><b>* Discussion :</b></i>


- To express interest:
+ I’d like you to meet ….
+ It’s nice to meet you…
+ It’s great to be in Vietnam
+ I’d like to sit with Tim
- To express a request


+ Would you mind sitting in the front
seat….?


+ Would you mind if I took a photo?


statements and then correct false
statements


- T. corrects


- T. asks Ss to pick out the sentences
containing the situations mentioned
below


Ss: work in pairs



E,

Sum up

.



 Structure “mind”


<i>F, Homework.</i>


 Learn by heart new words


 read and translate the dialogue into Vietnamese


<i><b>G, Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...


...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 65


Unit 11 . Traveling around vietnam



<b>Lesson 2: Speak + Listen</b>


<i><b>A. Objective:</b></i>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make and respond to formal requests
<b>using mind</b>“ ” and make suggestions .Get information from simple tourist
advertisements by listening and reading



<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i> Grammar: </i> - Would you mind + Ving


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, stereo


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- 2 Ss practice the dialogue before the
class


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


* Play game : What does it say?


<i>Ex: - Yes, I do.</i>


Ss: Do you like your teacher ?
- Teacher.


Ss: What does Mr Minh do ?


<i>III/ New lesson </i>



<i>1. Speak</i>



<i><b>a, Pre - Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>* Model sentences</b></i>


Ex1: Would you mind sitting in the front
seat of the taxi?


- No problem


Ex2 : Would you minf if I took a photo?
- Not at all


Form:


1. Would / Do you mind + Ving ?


<i> (Dùng để yêu cầu ngời khỏc lm vic</i>


<i>gì một cách lịch sự)</i>


2. Would you mind if I + Ved …?


- Do you mind if I + V (present simple
form) ?


<i>( Dùng để hỏi xin phép một cách lịch sự)</i>
<i> b, While - Speaking</i>



<i><b>* Mapped dialogue</b></i>
G1: Market (Ben Thanh)
G2: History museum
G3: Restaurants


G4: Zoo and botanical Gardens
G5: Stam and coins market


- Ss work in pairs, 1 student give the
guide, 1 student give the qustions


- T. reminds Ss of the exchanges
between Hoa and Mr Jones and
between Hoa and Jim in the last
discussion and elicit the sentences
from Ss


Eg:


- Would/ Do you mind opening the
window?


- Would you mnd not smoking?


Eg:


- Would you mind if I used your
phone?


- Do you mind if I smoke?



- T sets the scence : “You are on
vacation in HCM city .You want to
visit a market”


-Have sts open their books and use
the information on p. 101 to practice
other dialogue


- Ss work in 5 groups
- approx : kho¶ng


- revolutionary museum (n)
- vegetarian (n)


- Botanical(n)


- T. gets Ss to work in pairs
- Ss work in pairs


- T. asks some Qs and calls on Ss to
answer


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

<i><b>2.Listen</b></i>



<i><b>a, Pre - Listening</b></i>



<i><b>* Chatting:</b></i>


- Where is the Ho Tay road ?



- How can I go from Ho Tay Road to Da
Lat street ?


- . . .


<i><b>* Matching:</b></i>
- Check
- Opposite
- direction
- Beside
- Bookseat


- Ngà t
- Kiểm tra
- Đặt chỗ
- Đối diện
- Cạnh
<i><b>* Guessing</b></i>


Guessing Listening
A


B
C
D
E


<i>b, While - Listening</i>



*Answer key:
a, Restaurant
b, hotel
c, bus station
d, pagoda
e, temple


<i><b>c, Post – Listening</b></i>


<i><b>* Retell the journey </b></i>


- Ask Ss to match the words with
their meaning.


- Ask Ss to work in groups, guessing
the places


- T. plays the tape 2- times.


- Ss listen and correct their guessing.
- Call on some Ss to give the answer.
- T. gives feedback


- Ss work in groups, retell the
journey of them.


- Call on Some groups to act the
charactors in the dialogue.


E

, Sum up




- Structure: “mind”


<i>F.</i> <i>Homework.</i>


 Do ex 1,3,4 in the workbook


<i>G.</i> Marks and Remarks


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 66


Unit 11 . Traveling around vietnam



<b>Lesson 3 - Read</b>
<i><b>A.Objectives:</b></i>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make some suggestions on some
tourist sites in Viet Nam to foreign tourist, by reading for details about some places of
interests in Vietnam .


<i><b>B.Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>*Vocabulary: tire, pipe, deposit, refill, melt…</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure



<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b> *Wordsquare (poster)</b></i>


a d d y r e s o r t
d c a t g b e a c H
K N L R Y s a p a e
B U A I M K S A p c
A H T B V B I P j I
C A V E S L D K i T
H L N L A K E C T a
M O U N T A I N r D
A N H A T R A N G e
A g D e f g x c u L


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Reading</b></i>



<i><b>* Vocabulary</b></i>


- Accommodations (n) chỗ ở
- moutain - climbing (n)


- florist (n) who sells flowers
- import > < export (v)


* Matching


A B


1.Nha Trang
2. Dalat
3. Sapa


a. tribal viallages, moutain
climbing


b. the place where president


- Ss work in groups of four to find 13
hidden words and write them on a
piece of paper.


(Answer:  resort, beach, Sapa, caves,
lake, moutain, Nhatrang


 Halong, Dalat, tribe, seaside, the
citadel


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

4. Ha Long
bay


5. Nha Rong


harbor


HCM left VN in 1911
c. swimming and sunbathing
d. Oceanic institute


e. flower gardens

<i><b>2, While - Reading</b></i>


<i><b>* Grid:</b></i>


Answer key:
1


2
3
4
5
6
7


HL Bay
Nha Trang
Dl, SP, HL b
4 places
HL Bay
Sa Pa
Nha Trang


8
9


10
11
12
13
14


No place
HL Bay
4 places
No places
Sa Pa
DaLat
HL Bay
*Check (V) on the boxes


a- Sapa


b- Nha Trang
c- Nha Rong Habor
d- Ha Long Bay
e- Da Lat


3, Post - Reading
<i><b>* Role play:</b></i>


<i>S1: Where should Adrew go?</i>
<i>S2: He should go to Sapa.</i>
S1: Why?


<i>S2: Because he studies tribes and he</i>



<i>likes moutain climbing.</i>


- T. asks Ss to read the
advertisements about the resorts and
check the topics mentions in the grid.
- Ss work in groups and then call on
them to give the answers


+Let sts work in groups to hlep
people find out a suitable place
-Sts work in group then write on
extraboard


-T gives feedback


- Ss work in pairs, ask and answer
the Qs, using the informations in the
text.


- T. writes the model sentence on the
board.


- Call on some pairs to practice


E,

Sum up



 Some interest places in Viet Nam


<i>F, Homework.</i>



 Learn by heart new words


 Read and translate all the text above into Vienamese
<i><b>G.</b></i> <i><b>Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 67


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<i><b>Lesson 4 :Write</b></i>


<i><b>A. Objective:</b></i>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write narative, by using the guided
composition.


<i><b>B.Teaching content:</b></i>


 Vocabulary: canoe, paddle, hire, overturn, rescue…..
<i>VI.</i> <i>C.</i> <i>Teaching aids :</i>


 Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…
<i>VII.</i> <i>D.</i> <i>Teaching procedure</i>


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>



- Tell about places of interest in VN
which were learned in the last lesson


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


-Recall an accident


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>I. Presentation</b></i>


<i><b>a)Vocabulary</b></i>


<i>- adventure (n) cuéc phiªu lu</i>


- paddle (n) đạp nc , (n) tay chèo
- canoe (n) ca no


- rescue (n) cøu
- overturn (v) lËt óp


- move up and down (v) nhÊp nh«
- lean over (v) nhoµi ra


<i>* Checking:</i>
Jumble words


<i><b>b) Ordering statements:</b></i>


<i><b>Key: </b></i>




<b> c </b>

<b> a </b>

<b> g </b>

<b> d </b>

– –

<b> f </b>


<b>b </b>

<b> e </b>



<i><b>2, While - Writing</b></i>


<i><b>a) Match A and B</b></i>



A B
1. stumble a. văng lên


2. go off b. đồng hồ báo thức
3. realize c. lạ thay


4. rock d. nhận ra
5. alarm clock e. tảng đá
6. strangely f. trợt chân


<i><b>b) Odering pictures</b></i>



d – b – e – h – a – f – c



- Call on one or two Ss to do the task


- Ss listen and repeat


- T. (sets the scence): Last week ,
while on vacation in Dalat, the Jones
famaly had a quite adventure on
Xuan Huong lake. What did they do
and what happened to them?



- Ss listen find out new words
- T. explains the new words


- T. asks Ss to open their books , read
the first part of the story on page 105
and rearrange the sentences on page
106 to complete the story.


- Ss work in pairs


- T. gives correct answers and asks
one or two Ss to read story aloud
- T. asks Ss to look at the pictures on
page 106 and guess the meaning of
the new words


- Ss work in pairs
- T. gives feedback


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

– g



<b>c) Write</b>



1. She had a Math exam on Friday but
she got up late.


2. She realized her alarm clock didn’t
go off.



3. As she was leaving home, it started to
rain heavily.


4. Uyen tried to run as fast as she could.
5. Suddenly she strumbled against a rock
and fell into the road.


6. Her schoolbag went into a pool of
water and everything got wet.


7. Strangely, the rain stopped as she got
to her classroom.


8. Luckily, Uyen had enough time to
finish her exam .


<i><b>3, Post - Writing</b></i>


<i><b>* Recall the story</b></i>


T: asks Ss to read the story aloud


E,

Sum up



<i> Write a narrative </i>


<i>F, Homework.</i>


 Do Ex 9


<i><b>G, Marks and Remarks</b></i>



...
...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

Unit 11 . Traveling around vietnam



<i><b>Lesson 5 : Language focus</b></i>


<i><b>A. Objective:</b></i>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use present and past participles to
describe things and people.


<i><b>B.Teaching content:</b></i>


<i> Grammar: Making requets with</i>
- Would / Do you mind if I . . . ?
 Would / Do you mind + V-ing……..?


- ed and -ing participles


<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


<b>Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…</b>


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>



- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b> * Play memory game :</b></i>


Key: bow, lamp, truck, doll, flowers,
elephant, bear, rabbit, trunk


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1, Presentation
<i><b> * Structures </b></i>


<i><b>a. Present participle (V- ing)</b></i>


ex : Who is the man walking up the
stairs ?


<b>-The man walking up the stairs is </b>
N V-ing


Mr.Quang


<b>-The boy r eading book is Ba</b>


N + V-ing


<i>- HTPT có thể đợc dùng để thay cho</i>



<i>mệnh đề quan hệ ở thể chủ động</i>


<i><b>b. Past participle (V- ed (P</b></i>II)


<b>ex: The old lamp made in China is 5 </b>
N V-p.p


Dollars


N + V-p.p


<i>- QKPT có thể đợc dùng để thay thế cho</i>


<i>MĐQH khi động từ ở thể bị động</i>


<i><b>c.Request</b></i>
ex1:


-Do you mind closing the door ?


- T. asks Ss to open their books and
observe the picture on page 109
- Ss look at the picture and then close
their books and write names of
things they have just seen in the
picture.


- T. (sets the scene): It’s time for
recess and the people at Quang trung


school are in the school jard . What
are they doing?


-T explains examples
-Let sts make form


S1:The man who is standing over
there is my teacher


S2: The man standing……


<i>Ss look at the pictures and work in</i>
<i>pairs</i>


<i>- Would you mind if I turned on the</i>
<i>air conditioner?</i>


<i>I d refer you didn t </i>’ ’


<i>- Do you mind If I watch Tv while</i>
<i>having dinner?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

-Would V-ing


Meaning : nhờ ai làm việc gì
Do / Would + you mind + V-ing ?
Ex2:


- Do you mind if I take a photo ?
- Would took a photo ?



Do + you mind if I + V-inf?
Would V-past ?


 Meaning : mình làm việc gì đó
2.Practice


<i><b>* Language focus 1</b></i>


S1: The man who is walking up the stairs
is Mr Quang


S2: The man walking up the stairs is Mr
Quang


1. Mrs Lien / carrying a bag
2. Nam/ talking to Miss Lien
<i><b>* Language focus 2</b></i>


1. Where is the old lamp made in?
- China


2. What color is the box painted? (green)
3. What is the truck recycled from?
(cans)


………


Ex1: S1: How much is the box painted
green?



S2: The box painted green is $2


* Language focus 3



a. S1: Would you mind moving your car?
S2 : No. of course not.


b. Do you mind putting out your
cigarette?


- No, I don’t mind
<i><b>* Language focus 4</b></i>


a, - Do you mind if I sit down?
Please do


- Would you minf if I smoked?
I’d rather you didn’t


- Do you mind if I make a phone call?
Please do.


- Would you mind if I turned down the
cassette player?


Please go ahead


<i>3, Production</i>



<i><b>* Gaps filling: </b></i>


 Present or past participle


S1: The toys which were made in
China are cheap


S2: The toys made in China were
cheap


- Ss work in pairs


- T. gives feedback and calls on some
pairs to practice before the class


- T. asks Ss to look at the picture on
P.109


- Ss answer the Qs


- Ss work in pairs to practice LF2


- Ss copy and do the ex


- T. gets Ss to work in pairs
- Ss work in pairs


* Ss look at the pictures and work in
pairs



- Would you mind if I turned on the
air conditioner?


I’d refer you didn’t


- Do you mind If I watch Tv while
having dinner?


I’ d rather you didn’t


+Let sts do exercise


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

( sit, break, live, water, sing)


1. The girl ……at 5 Tran Hung Dao is
my friend


2. The garden …….everymorning is full
of flowers


3. The cat ……on the table is my sister’s
4. The vase ……yesterday is my father’s
favourite one


5. The woman ……….on the stage
is my neighbour


E

, Sum up



 Structure: V-ed; V- ing



<i>F, Homework.</i>


 Prepare for the text


<i><b>G, Marks and Remarks</b></i>


<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 69


<i><b>Revision</b></i>


<i><b>A/ Objectives:</b></i>


• <i><b>By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to review tenses and vocabulary</b></i>
learnt from unit 9 to unit 11


<b>B/Teaching procedure</b>
*Grammar


<i><b>1.Future simple tense</b></i>


<i><b>Ex :Aunt Mai will be there in two hours</b></i>


S will V-inf



<b>*Động từ Will dùng trong câu đề nghị , lời hứa và ngỏ ý giúp đỡ</b>
Ex : Will you empty the garbage can , please ?


2.In order to / so as to : chỉ mục đích


Ex: My brother is studying very hard in order to pass the final exam .
<i><b>So as to</b></i>


3.Passive voice


Ex : Most glass is recycled
S be Vp.p


<i><b>4.Tính từ đi với động từ nguyên thể và mệnh đề danh từ</b></i>
 It is not difficult to remember


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

<i><b>5.Dạng động từ V-ed và V-ing</b></i>


Ex1: The boy is in my class . He is reading a book.


 > The boy reading a book is in my class


Ex2: There are many books . They are written in English .


 > There are many books written in English .


<i><b>6.Câu đề nghị với : </b></i>


 Do / Would you mind + V-ing ?
 Do / Would you mind if ...?



Ex : Do you mind closing the door ?
Ex :Do you mind if I open the door ?
<b>*Exercise </b>


 Turn into the passive form.


1. They can’t make tea with cold water.


2. The engineer was instructing all the workers.
3. Somebody has taken some of my books away.
4. They will hold the meeting before May day.
5. We have to repair the engine of the car.


6. The boy broke the window and took away some pictures.
7. People spend a lot of money on advertising everyday.
8. They may use this room for the classroom.


9. The teacher is going to tell a funny story.
10.Mary is cutting the cake with a sharp knife.


 Combine the sentences, using the cue given.


1. Minh does morning exercises regularly. He wants to be healthy. (So as to).
2. You have to wear warm clothes. You won’t catch a cold (in order to).


3. Please close the window. I don’t want anybody to look at my room.( so that).
4. I’ll write to Mai. I want to invite her to my birthday party (so as to).


5. She said nothing. She didn’t want to make him angry. ( so as to).


6. I’m learning English. I want to read books in English.(in order to).


7. Mrs. Hien decided to give up her job. She wanted to have more time with her
children.(in order to).


8. He locked the door. He wanted nobody to disturb him.(so that).
9. Mr. Tam saves money. He wants to do an MA course abroad.(so that)
10.He hurried up to the station. He didn’t want to miss the train.( so as to)


 Choose the best answer.


1. The ruler (making/ made) of plastic is Lan’s.
2. Do you mind if I (open/opened) this window?


3. Tim (never saw/ has never seen) rice paddies before.


4. Would you mind (doing/ did) the washing – up for me tonight?
5. I’d rather you (not put off/ didn’t put off) the shoes.


6. The woman (talking/ talked) to the headmaster will make a speech about protecting
historical buildings.


7. It is a(thirty- minute/ thirty- minutes)driver from here to the city center.
8. They are traveling to the airport (by/in) a bus.


<b>C/Home work </b>


 Learn structure prepare for test


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

Date of planning :


Date of teaching :
Period 70


<b>Written Test 3</b>


A/The aim .


 Listening : listen to the passage about Fred then choose the best answer
 Reading : read the text about John then answer true or false


 Writing : write sentences use the words given .


 Language focus : circle the best answer to complete the sentences .


B/Ma TrËn


Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng


TN TL TN TL TN TL


1. Listening 5


2,5 5 2,5


II. Reading 5


2,5 5 2,5


III.Writing 5



2,5 5 2,5
IV.Language


focus 10 2,5 10 2,5


<b>Tæng</b> <b>10</b>


<b> 2,5</b> <b>10 5,0</b> <b>5 2,5</b> <b>25 10</b>


C/Content


J. Listening


<i>*Listen to the passage then choose the best answer (2,5 points)</i>


The other day , Fred, Mai’s penpal came to Viet Nam on a working trip . He spent
(1)... in Viet Nam , particularly ,(2) ... in the city of Can Tho , Fred had an
opportunity to see Mai , his (3)... penpal right in her locality . Before that , he had
sent Mai an (4) ... about his trip to Viet Nam . Therefore , Mai was (5)... to
meet him in person to introduce him to her family .


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

5. a, happy b, delighted c, eager
<i><b>II.</b></i> <i><b>Reading</b></i>


<i>Read the passage then decide if the following sentences are true (T) or false (F)</i>


We are all destroying the Earth . The seas and rivers are too dirty to swim in . There
is so much smoke in the air that it is unhealthy to live in many of world’s cities . We
have cut down so many trees that there are now vast areas of wasteland all over the
world . As a result , farmers in parts of Africa can not grow enough to eat . In certain


countries in Asia there is too little rice . Wild animals are quickly disappearing . For
instance , tigers are rare in India now because we have killed too many .


<i>VIII. Rare : hiÕm</i>


1. We have planted many trees now
2. Smoke is harmful to human health
3. The seas and rivers are polluted now


4. In all over the world , farmers can not grow enough to eat
5. Wild animals are quickly appearing .


<i><b>III.</b></i> <i><b>Language focus</b></i>


<i>*Choose the best andwer in a , b , c or d to complete the sentences(2,5)</i>


1.Will your aunt be here? – No, she ………..


will b. not c. isn’t d. won’t


2.It is difficult ……..all the instructions at the same time


a. to remember b. remember c. remembering d. remembered
3. I am ……….that you want to know more.


a. please b. pleased c. pleasing d. to please


4.The work was done by……..


a.he b. they c. us d. she



5.Would you mind ... your car ?


a. move b. moving c. to move d.moved


6.Would you mind if I ... on the radio ?


a.turned b.turn c.turning d.turns
7.I’d like ... your parents


a.meet b. to meet c.meets d.meeting
8.The teacher will ... there in about 10 minutes


a.is b. are c. am d.be
9.I can see the boy ... a water buffalo


a.ride b. to ride c.riding d.rided


10.It’s ... to travel around Viet Nam .


a.interesting b. interested c. interestingly interestedly
<i><b>IV.</b></i> <i><b>Writing</b></i>


 Write a letter using the cue words (2,5)
Dear ...,


1. Thank you / much / flowers / you / send / while / I / hospital
2. They / beautiful .


3. I / come out / hospital / Thursday morning .



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

5. I / look / forward / see / soon.


Dear... ,


...
...
...
...
...
...


...


<i><b>Key:</b></i>


I . Listening


Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm


1 . B 2 . C 3 . A 4 . A 5 . C

<b>Tapecripts :</b>



The other day , Fred, Mai’s penpal came to Viet Nam on a working trip . He spent
(1) three weeks in Viet Nam , particularly ,(2) three days in the city of Can Tho , Fred
had an opportunity to see Mai , his (3) two-year penpal right in her locality . Before
that , he had sent Mai an (4) e-mail about his trip to Viet Nam . Therefore , Mai was
(5) eager to meet him in person to introduce him to her family .


<b>II.Reading </b>




<i>Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm</i>


1. F 2 . T 3 . T 4 . F 5 . F
IV.Language focus


Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm


1 . d 2 . a 3 . b 4 . c 5 . b
6 . a 7 . b 8 . d 9 . c 10 . b


<i><b>III.Writing</b></i>


<i>IX.</i> <i>Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm</i>


1. Thank you very much for flowers you sent while I was hospital
2. They were beautiful .


3. I came out the hospital on Thursday morning .


4. Will You come over to my place on the weekend ? because I am very bored
now .


5. I look forward to seeing you soon.


<b>D/Remarks and marks</b>


...


...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

Period 71


<i><b>Correcting the test</b></i>


<b>A/Aim</b>


 After correcting students can find out their mistakes


B/Teaching procedure


K. Listening


<i>*Listen to the passage then choose the best answer (2,5 points)</i>


The other day , Fred, Mai’s penpal came to Viet Nam on a working trip . He spent
(1)... in Viet Nam , particularly ,(2) ... in the city of Can Tho , Fred had an
opportunity to see Mai , his (3)... penpal right in her locality . Before that , he had
sent Mai an (4) ... about his trip to Viet Nam . Therefore , Mai was (5)... to
meet him in person to introduce him to her family .


1. b, three weeks 2. c, three days 3. a, two- year 4. a, e-mail 5 c, eager


II. Reading


<i>Read the passage then decide if the following sentences are true (T) or false (F)</i>


We are all destroying the Earth . The seas and rivers are too dirty to swim in . There
is so much smoke in the air that it is unhealthy to live in many of world’s cities . We
have cut down so many trees that there are now vast areas of wasteland all over the
world . As a result , farmers in parts of Africa can not grow enough to eat . In certain


countries in Asia there is too little rice . Wild animals are quickly disappearing . For
instance , tigers are rare in India now because we have killed too many .


<i>X.</i> <i>Rare : hiÕm</i>


1. F 2 . T 3 . T 4 . F 5 . F
III. Language focus


<i>*Choose the best andwer in a , b , c or d to complete the sentences(2,5)</i>


1.Will your aunt be here? – No, she ………..


d. won’t


<b>2.It is difficult + to -V……..all the instructions at the same time</b>
<i><b>a.</b></i> <i><b>to remember </b></i>


3. I am +adj……….that you want to know more.
<i><b>b.</b></i> <i><b>pleased</b></i>


4.The work was done by +O……..
<i><b>c.</b></i> <i><b>us </b></i>


5.Would you mind + V-ing ... your car ?
b. moving


6.Would you mind if I +V-past ... on the radio ?
a.turned


7.I’d like +to-V ... your parents



b. to meet


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

9.I can see the boy + V-ing... a water buffalo
c.riding


10.It’s +adj ... to travel around Viet Nam .
<i><b>a.interesting </b></i>


<i><b>IV. Writing</b></i>


 Write a letter using the cue words (2,5)
Dear ...,


6. Thank you very much for flowers you sent while I was hospital
7. They were beautiful .


8. I came out the hospital on Thursday morning .


9. Will You come over to my place on the weekend ? because I am very bored
now .


10.I look forward to seeing you soon.


<i><b>C/Remarks and marks</b></i>


...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :



Unit 12 . A vacation abroad
* Division: 5 lessons


<b>A. Objectives</b>


 By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to:
 make plans


 make , accept and decline invitations.
 ask and answer about the weather
 Write a postcard


B. Teaching contents


<i>1. Vocabulary: bother, carve, include</i>…
2. Grammar:


- Past progressive with when and while
- Present progressive with always
<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Stereo ,Pictures, cards ,Small board


Period 72


<i><b>Lesson 1:Getting started </b></i>–<i><b> Listen and read</b></i>


<b>A. Objective:</b>




<b> By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to know how to make, accept and </b>
decline invitations


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

 making complaint


C. Teaching aids :


• <b>Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, stereo…</b>


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Guessing game</b></i>
a. Statue of liberty
b. The Opera house
c. Empire state Building
<i>* Chatting</i>


S1: Which country do you want to visit?
S2: I’d like to visit Australia


S1: Why?


S2: Because Australian people are
friendly


<i>II/ New lesson </i>



1, Presentation
<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- abroad (adv) = in a foreign country
- tour (n) chuyÕn du lÞch


- include (v) bao gåm , gåm cã
- ticket price (n) gi¸ vÐ


- come over (v) ghÐ qua


- pick smb up (v) đến đón , rớc
- S +be ( is, are) +always + Ving
<i>(Than phiền ai luôn làm việc gì)</i>
Eg: She is always talking so much
<i><b>b) T/F prediction</b></i>


1. Ms Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from
the airport


2. Mrs Smith invited Mrs Quyen and her
husband to stay with her while they are
in town


3. Mrs Quyen doesn’t accept Mrs
Smith’s invitation because she wants to
stay with a Vietnamese friend of hers
4. Mrs Quyen and her husband will be
in the USA for 3 days.



5. Mrs Quyen and her husband wil come
over to Mrs Smith’s place for dinner one
night.


6. Mr Thanh goes abroad for a business
meeting.


<i>2, Practice</i>


<i><b>a)Read the dialogue</b></i>


- T.asks Ss to guess which country it
is in


- Ss work in 4 groups


a. The United States of America
b. Australia


c. Thailand
d. Britain
e. Canada
f. Japan


- T. introduces the topic and sets the
<i>scene:Mrs Quyen is going to the USA</i>


<i>for a vacation . She is ringing her</i>
<i>friend, Mrs Smith to tell her about</i>


<i>the trip . introduce new words </i>


- Ss listen to the teacher and copy
new words , make sentences .then
repeat them


- T. asks Ss to listen and repeat after
the tape


- Ss listen and repeat after tape. Then
practice in pairs


- T. calls on some pairs to read in
front of the class.


- T. asks Ss to read the text silently
- Ss guess before reading. Then read
the text in pairs. Correct false
sentences


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<i><b>b)True/false</b></i>
1. F


2. T
3. False
4. T
5. F
<i><b>c) Grid</b></i>


Date Mon



25 th Tue<sub>26 </sub>th Wed<sub>27</sub>th Thu<sub>28</sub>th


<i><b>S</b></i>


<i><b>ch</b></i>


<i><b>ed</b></i>


<i><b>u</b></i>


<i><b>le</b></i> coming
to San
Fransis
co


Going


out Havingdinner
with
the
Smiths


Leavin
g San
Francis
co


<i><b>d) Comprehension questions:</b></i>



1. Will Mrs Quyen’s husband have
dinner with the Smith’s ? why(not)?
2. Will Mrs Quyen and her husband stay
at miss Smith’s house? Why? Why not?
3. How will Mrs Quyen go to Mrs
Smith’s house?


<i><b>3, Production</b></i>



<i><b>*Grammar A wareness</b></i>
+ Making invitations


<i>- Would you like to come and stay with</i>


<i>us ?</i>


<i>- Would you must come over for dinner</i>
<i>one night?</i>


+ Accept an invitation


“Yes, We’d love to but we’ll only be in
town for three nights”


+ Declining an invitation


<i>- That s very kind of you but we re</i>’ ’


<i>coming on tour</i>



+ Making a complaint


<i>- Oh dear . He s always working</i>’


- Ss work in pairs
- Ss copy the grid


- T. asks Ss to read the dialogue


- Ss work in pairs to complete Mrs
Quyen’s schedule with the
information taken from the dialogue
- T. calls on some Ss to go to the
board to write the information in the
grid


- Ss work in pairs to answer the Qs
- T. gives feedback and calls on some
pairs to ask and answer


- Ss read the dialogue again and pick
out the statements indicating the
following situations


- T. asks Ss to find out and then asks
them to speak aloud


Ss: copy


E

, Homework.




 Learn by heart new words


 read and translate the dialogue into Vietnamese
 Ex 1,2 (70)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 73</b>


Unit 12 . A vacation abroad


Lesson 2 :Speak + Listen



<b>A/Objective: </b>


• By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to talk about their plans for a trip abroad .
To practice listening about the weather forecast about the weather in big cities in the world
<b>B. Teaching content</b><i><b> : </b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: gallery, flight, via, facility, brochure….</i>
<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures , stereo


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>



- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>*Chatting</b></i>


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<b>1.Speak</b>


<b>a) Pre - Speaking</b>


<i><b>* Vocabulary:</b></i>


- itinerary (n) lé tr×nh
- gallery (n) triÓn l·m
- via (prep) qua


- brochure (n) tờ quảng cáo
<i><b>* Matching</b></i>


1. itinerary


2. flight information
3. hotel advertisement
4. travel brochure
<i><b>* Checking</b></i>


1. For the flight information table


<i>- How many flights a week can you take</i>


<i>from Los Angeles to Boston?</i>


2. For the Hotel advertisement?


<i>- Which of the hotel is cheaper?</i>


3. For the travel brochure


<i>- Where can you visit?</i>


- T asks sts some questions about
Mrs.Q


- Ss answer


T. explains by using some real
things or pictures


- S s practice reading


- T. expains four tables and asks Ss to
match them with the titles


- T. asks Ss to look at 5 tables on the
board and answer T’s questions
- Ss look at the table and give some
informations


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

<b>b), While – Speaking</b>


<i><b>-Modal dialogue</b></i>


<i><b>S</b></i>

<i><b>1</b></i>

<i><b>: Where shall we stay?</b></i>



S2: The Revere hotel is expensive but it
has a gym


S2: Where should we visit?


S1: I think we should visit Haverd
Medical school , the Museums and Arts
gallery.


S1: What time should we leave Los
Angeles?


S2: There’s a daily flight at 10 a.m,
Would that be ok?


S1: Ok


<i>c)Post - speaking</i>


<i>Depart Los Angeles: Flight 942 at 10</i>


<i>a.m</i>


<i>Arrive Boston: 4.00</i>


<i>Accomodation: The rever hotel</i>



<i>Sight seeing: Havard Medical school ,</i>


<i>the museum and arts gellery</i>


<b>2.Listen</b>


<b>a) Pre - Listening</b>



<b>* Brainstorming:</b>


<i><b>* Possible answer:</b></i>


- cloudy, cool, cold, warm, hot, dry, fine,
humid, rainy, snowy, sunny, wet, windy,
stormy, degree, minus, centigrate…


<i><b>* Chatting</b></i>


1, Have you ever listened to the weather
forcast on TV or on the radio?


2. What does it often tell you about?
3. Do you think It’s necessary to listen
to the weather forecast?


4. What do you know about the high and
the low temprature?


<b>b) While - Listening</b>




<i>* Gap filling</i>



Temperature


City weather low high


1. Sydney
2. Tokyo
3. London
4. Bangkok


dry, windy
dry, windy
humid, cold


warm, dry
20
15
-3
24


26
22
7
22


- Ss work in pairs to practice with
using replace method


- After reading the dialogue, Ss find


informations to fill in the itinerary
- Ss work in pairs to make new
dialogue


- T. asks Ss to find the words related
to the topic


- Ss work in groups


- T. asks Ss some Qs to lead in the
lesson


- Ss answer the qs


<i>(It refers to the lowest and highest</i>


<i>temprature degrees in a day)</i>


- T. puts the gap fill table on the
board, asks Ss to copy in their
notebooks


- Ask Ss to fill in the gaps with the
information you hear.


- T. plays the tape twice then gives
feedback


- Ss ask and answer Qs about the
weather and temprature, using the


information in the table in pairs
- T. calls on some pairs to practice in


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

5.New york


6. Paris


windy,
cloudy


cool, dry
8


10 1516


<b>c) Post - Listening</b>



<b>* Model dialogue:</b>


S1: what’s the weather like in Sydney
today?


S2: It wil be dry and windy
S1: How abut the temperature?


S2: The low will be 20 and the high will
be 26 degrees


front of the class



E

, Homework

.



 Do ex 5 (P73) in the workbook


<i><b>F, Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 74</b>


<b>Unit 12 . A vacation abroad</b>



Lesson 3 :Read



<b>A. Objective</b>


• By the end of the lesson, Students will be able to obtain some knowledge about
some scenic spots in the USA


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: vocano, lava, por out, carve, be situated, overhead, </i>


<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, postcards…



D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- Talk about the weather forecast.


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b> Net work</b></i>


Chicago Washington


- Ss work in groups


- T. asks Ss to read the words given
aloud


- Ss read aloud


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

New Yord Los Angeles


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Reading</b></i>



<i><b>a)Vocabulary</b></i>


- volcano (n) nói lưa


- lava (n) nham th¹ch
- pour out (v) trµo ra
- wine - growing area (n)
- carve (n) tr¹m, kh¾c
- shore (n) bê biĨn
- valley (n) thung lịng
- Empire state building (n)
<i>* Checking</i>


What and where


<i><b>2,While –Rreading</b></i>



<i><b>* Grid </b></i>


place What she did and saw


a. Hawaii
b. New York
c. Chicago
d. M. Rushmore


e. San Fransisco


- went swimming , visited
Kilawea


- went shopping , bought
souvernirs



- saw lake Michigan
- saw the heads of 4
American presidents
carved in


- Visited Fisherman ‘s
Wharf, The naPa valley
wine growing …


<i><b>P3, Post - Reading</b></i>



<i><b>* Questions:</b></i>


1. How did Mrs Quyen go to Kilawea
vocano?


<i>- By plane</i>


2. Where in San Fransisco did Mrs
Quyen see the famous prison?


<i>- Alcatraz</i>


3. What’s the special about Mouth
Rusmore?


<i>- there are heads of four American</i>


<i>presidents are carved into the rock</i>



4. what’s the other name of Chicago?
<i>- The windy city</i>


5. What did Mrs Quyen do while her
husband was visiting the statue of


- T. asks Ss to read and find out new
words


- Ss read and find out new words.
- Listen - Repeat and Copy


<i>(using pictures)</i>


-T sets the scence : “ our reading is
the words postcards that Mrs.Quyen
gave her children .Then read the
postcards


-Sts read silently


- T. draws the grid on the extraboard.
- Ask Ss to read the postcards and fill
in the gaps with the infornation.
- Call on some Ss to write out.
T. gives feedback and corrects


- T. asks Ss to read the text in pairs to
answer the Qs



- Ss work in pairs


- T. checks and then corrects
Qs:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

liberty?


<i>- She went shopping</i>


E, Sum up



 Some interest places in USA


<i><b>F, Homework.</b></i>


 Ex 7(P 75)


<i><b>G, Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 75


<i><b>Unit 12 . A vacation abroad</b></i>
Lesson 4 : Write


<i><b>A. Objective: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write postcards to their</b></i>



friends about their trips


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: complain, hospitable……</i>
<i>2. Grammar: Past simple tense</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : Ss’ books, small boards, pictures, cards</b>…
D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- where did Mrs Quyen and her husband
spend theiir holiday?


<i> (Waikiki beach, Oahu, Kilauea Volcano, San</i>


Francisco bay, Mount Rushmore, Chicago,
<i>New york, Washington, Las vegas, …..)</i>


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b> Game: Lucky numbers:</b></i>


- T. writes names of some places in
America that Mrs Quyen visited and
some others are not and asks Ss to


find out the cities that Mrs Quyen
visited


- Ss answer and do the task


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

1 2 3 4 5


6 7 8 9 10


<i>* Questions</i>


1. Where did Mrs Quyen and her
husband spend on their holiday?


2. Lucky number.


3. What did Mrs Quyen see in M.R?
4. Who did they visit when they were in
the USA?


5. Lucky number.


6. What did Mrs Quyen do while her
husband was visiting Statue of Liberty
7. Lucky number.


8.What did Mrs Quyen buy?


9. What did they send to her children
from the USA?



<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Writing</b></i>


<i><b>a, Gap - fill</b></i>



<i><b>Key: </b></i>



1. in 2.people
3. weather 4. visited
5. her 6. nice (lovely)
7. bought 8. for


9. heaviness 10. soon
<i><b>b, Grid</b></i>


- Place: We’re having a wonderful time
in the USA


- How she feels about the people: The
people are friendly


- the weather: the weather has been
warm and sunny


- Who she meets/visits: In Fransisco
She visited her friend, Sandra Smith
- What she sees:


- what she bought: I bought lots of


souvenirs.


 Start a postcard ?
 Content


 Finish


<i><b>2, While – Writing</b></i>


*Write a postcard .


a. I / Ha Long Bay .


b. People / friendly . Weather / warm
and windy .


c. I / visit / my old friends and teachers .
d. I / see / parks , zoo .


e. I / buy / souvernirs / seafoods .


- T. reads the questions


- Ss answer. Each correct answer in 2
points.


Answer:
1. In the USA.


3. heads of four presidents of
America carved into the rock



4. The Smiths.


6. She went shopping
8. Lots of souvenirs
9. postcards


- T. sets the scene and asks Ss to look
at the postcard and complete the gaps
- Ss listen and do the task in pairs
- T. calls one S to write his or her
answer on the board


- Ss correct the answer


- Ss read the postcard and answer in
pairs.


- T. gives feedback and correct.


- Ss find necessary information to
write a postcard


+T asks sts about form of a postcard
- T. sets the scene and asks Ss to
write a postcard to a friend about
your trip , using the information in
the grid


- Ss work individually ( or in


groups )


- T. monitors and assists Ss with their
writing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

f. I / wish / I / can / visit Ha Long Bay
again .


<i><b>3, Post - Writing</b></i>


<i><b>*Correction </b></i>


+Posible answer :


<i><b>Dear Nga ,</b></i>



I’m having a wonderful time in Hue.
The people are very friendly and
hospitable but the weather is cold and
humid


In Hue, I visited my uncle and
aunts. I met all my cousins and we were
all happy to see each others


See you soon .
Love ,


Thu


postcards to the whole class


Ss: read aloud


E/, Sum up



 Format of a letter


<i><b>F/, Homework.</b></i>


 Do Ex 7 ( P75)


<i><b>G/ Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 76


<i><b>Unit 12 . A vacation abroad</b></i>


Lesson 5 :

Language focus


<b>A.</b> <b>Objective</b><i><b> : </b></i>


• By the end of the lesson ,Ss will be able to talk about activities using the
present and past progressive tenses


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>
<i>1. Vocabulary: V- ed (P</i>II) , V- ing



<i>2. Grammar: past progressive tense with when and while, present progressive with</i>
“always”


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

D. Teaching procedure:


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>
<i>II/ Warm up</i>


* Play memory game :


<i>Ex:</i>


S1: we learn English


<i>S2: we are lerning English</i>
<i>S3: . . . . .. . . </i>


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1, Presentation + Practice
Act 1: Language focus 1:
1. walk with a dog (e)
2. eat dinner (b)
3. take a shower (a)
4. talk to grandma (f)
5. read a comic ©
6. write a letter (d)



<i>* Gram mar</i>


<i><b>a) The Past continous tence</b></i>


Ex: Ba was taking a shower at eight
o’clock last night.


* Form:


S + was/ were + Ving


<i>* Usage: - Hành động đang xảy ra tại</i>


<i>một thời điểm xác định trong qk (at…</i>
<i>o clock)</i>’


- Hành động xảy ra trong qk thì hành
động khác xen vào


* Practice :


<i><b> Word Cue Drill.</b></i>
1. Ba/ take a shower
2. Hoa/ have dinner
3. Bao / read a comic
4. Nga/ write a letter
5. Na/ walk with her dog
6. Lan and her grandmother
<i><b>b)Conjunction : When & While </b></i>



<b>- When </b>


<b>Ex: The Le’s family was sleeping when </b>


<i><b> Be V-ing</b></i>


the mailman came


<i> V-past</i>


<i>*Use :diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra </i>


<i>trong qk thì 1 hđ khác xen vào , hđ xen </i>
<i>vào dùng thì qk đơn , thờng đi với liên từ</i>


“when”


<b>- While </b>


<b>Ex:I was reading book while my mother </b>
be V-ing


was cooking meal


- T. devides class into 2 groups. Asks
first S in one group to say a simple
sentence. Then ask the first S in the
other group repeat the previous
sentence ….



- Ss work in two groups


- T. asks Ss to look at the pictures
- T. reads the verbs and asks Ss to
listen and number the pictures


- T. asks Ss to answer the Qs
Eg:


- What was Na doing at 7 o’clock
last night?


+ She was walking with a dog


- Ss work in pairs to ask and answer
about the pictures


- show the cardboard and go through
the verds


- T. gives feedback and calls on some
pairs to practice before the class
- T. elicits the model sentences by
asking the questions


Eg:


- What was the Le family doing
when the mailman came?



+ They were sleeping
- How many actions are there ?


- Is (sleeping) V in the past continuos
?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

be V-ing
* Practice


Act 2: Language focus 2:
1. Answer:


a - C d - B
b - F e - D
c - E f - A


Eg: The family was sleeping when the
mailman came


<i><b>c) Progressive tenses with always</b></i>“ ”
ex:


<i><b>Bao is always fogetting her homework</b></i>
* Form: S + be + always + V- ing
<i>- DiÔn tả sự phàn nàn </i>


Act 3: Language focus 3 :
2, Production



* Exercise 4 ( P88- BTTA 8)


- T. asks Ss to look at the picture and
do matching


- Ss work in pairs


- T. elicits the model form Ss using
Vnmese


- Ss look at the pictures and make
sentences using form


- Ss work individually


D/ Homework

.



- Ex 1,2,3 ( P 119)
<i>XI.</i> <i>E/ Remarks and marks</i>


...
...
...


<b>Date of planning :</b>
Date of teaching :
Unit 13 . festivals
* Division: 5 lessons


<b>A. Objectives</b>



 By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:
 ask for explanations of events;


 give an account of something;


 write a paragraph about what was done.


<b>B. Teaching contents</b>


<i>1. Vocabulary: competition, participate, fetch, separate… </i>
<i>2. Grammar: - Passive form;</i>


- Compound words
- Reported speech
<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


- Stereo , Pictures, cards , Small board


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

Lesson 1:Getting started – listen and read


Language focus 3



<b>A. Objective: </b>


<b> By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for explanations of events, by </b>
reading for details about traditional Festivals


B. Teaching content:


<i>1. Vocabulary: fetch, yell, urge, rub, participate, award …</i>


<i>2. Grammar: - Compound Adjectives</i>


C. Teaching aids :


• <b>Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, stereo…</b>


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Check the old lesson</i>
<i>- Do exercises</i>


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Chatting: Getting Started</b></i>


<i>Tom, David, Hucklebery, Oliver,</i>
<i>Robinson</i>


1. Tom likes swimming and sunbathing.
Where should he go? …. Why? …
2. ………….


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1, Pre - Reading
<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>
<i>- fetch (v) ®i lÊy</i>



<i>- yell (v) cỉ vị , la hß</i>
<i>- urge (v) thóc dơc</i>
<i>- rub (v) cä s¸t</i>


<i>- participate (v) = to take part in</i>
<i>- award (v) thëng</i>


<i>- Judge (n) Giám khảo</i>
<i>- Bamboo (n) Cây tre</i>
<i>* What and Where</i>
<i><b>b) Open prediction:</b></i>


1. How many competitions do people
enter in a rice – cooking festival?


2. In water – festival competition, what
people do? How about a fire – making
competition? A rice – cooking
competition?


<i>2, While - Reading</i>


<i><b>a) Practice the dialogue</b></i>
<i><b>b) Prediction:</b></i>


- Ss do exercises


- T. writes the names on the board.
- Tell Ss these people are going to go
on their visits to VN and they need


advice on where to do


- T. introduces the topic and
introduces new words


- Ss listen to the teacher and copy
new words , make sentences .then
repeat them


- Checking


- Ask Ss to guess what they are going
to read by asking the questions then
write Ss’ answers on the board.


- T. asks Ss to listen to the tape and
read the dialogue.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

1. There are three.


2. Rice – cooking festival


Water - fetching fire - making rice - cooking
to fetch water to make a fire to cook rice


<i><b>c)True/ false</b></i>


a. False -> Only one team member
b. False -> . . .to collect one water bottle
c. T



d. F -> Pieces of bamboo


e. F -> the judges taste the rice.

<i><b>3, Post- Reading</b></i>



<i>* Grammar drill: Compoud Adjective.</i>
Ex:


A
A
A


article


rice –
water
-fire –
noun


cooking
fetching
making
V-ing


Festival


Competition


Noun


Compoud Adjectives
* Transformation Drill:


Answer: a, a fire – making contest
b, a bull – fighting fextival
c, a car – making industry
d, a flower – arranging contest
e, a rice – exporting country


- Check if Ss’ guesses are correct or
not.


- T. asks Ss to read the text silently
and check the boxes, using the
information in the dialogue.


- Get Ss to give their answers and
correct false sentences


- T. elicits the exampls and writes
them on the board.


- Ss work in pairs


- T. delivers posters to Ss


- Ask Ss todo the exercise P.130 and
write their answers on the posters.
Then put them on the board



- Give feedback and correct.


E,

Sum up



 Compound Adjectives


<i>F, Homework.</i>


 Learn by heart new words


 read and translate the dialogue into Vietnamese
 Do exercises


<i><b>G, Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 78


<i><b>Unit 13 : festivals</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

<b>A. Objective: </b>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about their preparations for a
special event, by speaking and listening for details


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>



<i>1. Vocabulary: pomegranate, Peach blossom, Marigolds, Dried water lemon seeds,</i>
Spring rolls ….


C. Teaching aids :


 Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cassette . . .


<b>D. Teaching procedure</b>


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’


<i>I/ Checking the old lesson</i>


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


 Net work:
Suggestion:


<i>- decorate/ clean/ pain the house/ ….</i>
<i>- Buy cakes/ candies/ drinks/ foods ….</i>
<i>- Cook/ make cakes …</i>


<i>- Write/ send New Year cards to friends.</i>


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<b>1.Speak</b>



<i><b>a). Pre – Speaking</b></i>


<i><b>a, Vocabulary:</b></i>


- pomegranate (n) quả lựu
- Peach blossom (n) hoa đào
- Marigolds (n) hoa bất tử


- Dried water lemon seeds (n) h¹t da
- Spring rolls (n) Giò, chả


<i>* Bingo</i>
b, Ordering:
Answer key:


A -> F B -> G
C -> H E -> I
D -> J


<i><b>b, While - Speaking</b></i>


<i><b>* Mapped dialogue:</b></i>


Mrs Quyen
A: you/ tidied/
bedroom?


B: market/ have to/
orange/pomegranates
C: sure/ will.


D:Not really/ but/


want house/ look


Lan


1. Yes/ where/ going
2. Could/ collect/
new Ao dai tailer.
3. Thanks/ anything/
want/ me/ do/ while/
out?


4. Mom/ I/ what/ do/


- Ask Ss to think of 5 things they
often prepare for Tet and write them
on a piece of paper.


- Ss work in groups


- T. explains by using some real
things or pictures


- Ss practice reading


- checking


- T. asks Ss to read the dialogue P.123
and put the sentences in the correct
order



- Call on some pairs to give the
answers.


- T. asks Ss to practice the exchange.
- call on some pairs to practice.
- T. monitors nad corrects
prepare for


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

like/ festival


E: That/ very good/
bye


now/ will/ clean/
glass windows.
5. Bye.


<b>2.Listen</b>


a, Pre – listening:


b, While – listening:
Answer:


a. Mr Robinson/ Flower market.
b. traditional


c. Dried water lemon seeds
d. make spring rolls



c, Post – listening:


<i><b>*Complete the notice Things to do</b></i>


Mr
Robinson


- Go to the Flower market to
buy Peach blossom and a banch
of Marigolds


Mrs
Robinson


- go to Mr Nga’s house to learn
how to make spring rolls


Liz - go to the market to buycandyies and a packet of dried
water lemon seeds


- Ask Ss to open the books and read
the statements P.124


- Get Ss to predict the words in the
gaps.


- Write the guesses on the board.
- T. plays the tape (2 -3 times)


- Ask Ss to listen and fill in the gaps


- Call on some Ss to write the
answers


- T. plays the tape again and corrects


- Ask Ss to fill in the gaps with the
information taken from the
statements above.


- Call on some Ss to give their
answers.


5,

Homework

.



 Write your own dialogue.
 Do exercises in the workbook


<i>6, Marks and Remarks</i>


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 79</b>


<b>Unit 13 . festivals</b>



Lesson 3 :Read


<b>A. Objective: </b>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get some knowledge about
Christmas


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

<i><b>C.</b></i> <i><b>Teaching aids : </b></i>


 Student’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I/ Checking the old lesson


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


- Listen to a Christmas song


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Reading</b></i>


<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- spread (v) lan truyền
- Chritmas carol (n) bài hành ca GS
- patron saint (n) đỡ đầu



- jolly (a) = happy/ cheerful
- decorate (v) trang trÝ


- Latvian city of Riga


<i>* Checking: Jumble words</i>


codraete
ontraptsian
<i><b> b) Matching :</b></i>


1. It has been said he was a patron saint
of children, a fat jolly man who wore a
red suit and gave children presents on
Christmas Eve.


2. The custom of decorating it and
putting it in a common place, spread
throughout Erope to America


3. They were stories put to music and
enjoyed by most people. First the leaders
of the Church did not like them but
later they become popular.


4. An English man had someone design
it to send Chritmas greetings to his
friends. Now it is apart of the Christmas
tradition.



a. Christmas carol
b. --- card
c. Santa Clause
d. Christmas tree


<i><b>2, While - Reading</b></i>


<i><b>a) Give the answers:</b></i>


Answer key:
1. c 2.d 3.a 4.b


<i><b>b) Complete the table</b></i>


- T. plays the tape


- T. asks Ss to read and find out new
words


- Ss read and find out new words.
Listen -Repeat and copy


- Ss do as T says


- T. asks Ss to sticks the pictures on
the board. And do the matching
- Ss work in pairs


- T. asks Ss to read the text silently
and give their answers



- Ss give their answers
- T. checks


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

- The Christmas tree, Riga, early 1500s
- The Christmas card, England, Mid 19th
century


- Christmas Carol, (no inf), 800 years
ago


- Santa Clause, USA, 1823

<i><b>3, Post - Reading</b></i>


<i><b>* Answer the questions: (P.126)</b></i>
Answer:


1. more than a century ago


2. He wanted to send Christmas
greetings to his friends


3. 800 years ago


4. An American professor named
Clement Clarke More


5. On the description of Saint Nicholas
in the poem


the texts and complete the grid
- Ss work in pairs



- Ask Ss to read the texts again and
answer the questions


- Ss work individually.


- Call on some to give the answers


4, Sum up



 Christmas day


<b>5, Homework.</b>


 Ex 4,5


 read and translate the texts into Viet namese


6, Marks and Remarks


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 80</b>


<b>Unit 13 . festivals</b>



Lesson 4 :Write




<b>A.Objective: </b>


• By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a report


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i> Grammar: Past simple tense</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I/ Checking the old lesson


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Memory game</b></i>


1. How many people are there in the


- T. asks Ss to look at the picture and
answer the qs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

picture? What are they doing?



2. Name all the things in the picture.


<i>(rice, basket, pans, bamboo sticks,</i>
<i>paper fans, chopstick, a flag)</i>


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Writing</b></i>


<i><b>Key: </b></i>



1. rice cooking 2.one
3. water- fetching 4. run


5. water 6. traditional
7. bamboo 8. six


9. separate 10. added


<i><b>2, While - Writing</b></i>


<i><b>* Answer the questions</b></i>



1. It’s a school festival to organize the
day of Youth Organization 26-3


2. The festival was held in the school
yard


3. the festival lasted half a day



4. There were a lot of activities such as :
meeting, singing, play games..


5. There were five competitions (shutle
cock- kicking, slowly- cycling, skipping
- contest)


6. How many people?


7. What did you think about the festival?


<i><b>3, Post - Writing</b></i>



<i><b>* Read your stories aloud</b></i>


the qs


- T. sets the scene and asks Ss to use
the informtion in the dialogue to fill
in the gaps in the report


- Ss work in pairs
- T. gives feedback


- F- councilor (n) thành viên tỏ chức
lễ hội


- report (n)


- T. asks Ss to read the complete


report aloud


- T. sets the scene and asks Ss to
write a similar report on a festival
they have just joined recently


- Ss look at the Qs given and work
individually


- T. monitors and assists Ss with their
writing


- T. calls on some Ss to read their
reports to the whole class


- Ss read aloud


4, Sum up



 Write a report


<i><b>5, Homework.</b></i>


 Do Ex 7 ( P75)


6, Marks and Remarks


...
...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

<b>Period 81</b>


<b>Unit 13 . festivals</b>



Lesson 5 :languege focus



<b>A. Objective: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use Reported speech and Passive in the Past
simple and Future tense.


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>
<i>*Grammar: V- ed (II) , V - ing</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’
I/ Checking the old lesson


- Read the report
- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b> * Play Pelmanism</b></i>



V - inf P-II
Put put
Write written
Do done


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1, Presentation


<i><b>* Passive form: matching</b></i>
Match A and B


<b>A. Tenses</b>


1. Present simple
2. Past simple
3. Future simple
4. Present perfect
2, Practice


<i><b>* Language focus 1</b></i>
a. were performed
b. was decorated
c. is made


d. will be held
e. was awared
f. was written


<i><b>* Language focus 2</b></i>


<i>+ Vocabulary</i>


- jumble (v) lµm lén xén
- scatter (v) r¶i


- jar (n) vại , lọ , bình
<i><b>* Reported speech</b></i>


eg: He said: “ I’m a plumber”
- He said that he was a plumber


- T. sticks the cards on the board.
- Ss work in groups of 3.


- T. asks Ss to match A and B
- Ss work in pairs


<b>B. form</b>


a. was/ were + V- ed (II)
b. have/ has been + V- ed (II)
c. am/ is/ are+ V- ed (II)
d. shall/ will + be + V- ed (II)


- Ss look at ex on P.128 and work in
pairs


- T. gives feedback


- Ss work in pairs to do the ex



- T. asks Ss to explain why they
decided to use that V-form


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

<i>Qui tắc biến đôỉ</i>


<i>- Tenses : Present simple -> Past simple</i>
<i> will -> would</i>
<i> must -> had to</i>
<i>- Adv of place and time:</i>


<i> this -> That</i>
<i> now -> then</i>
<i> here -> there</i>
<i> today -> that day</i>


<i> tomorrow ->the next day</i>
3, Production


<i><b>*Languague focus 4</b></i>


b. He said he could fix the faucets
c. He said the pipes were broken
d. He said new pipes were very ...
e. He said Mrs.Thu had to pay
him then .


<i>and said : I m a plumber </i>“ ’ “
- Ss report what he said in pairs



Ss: listen , find the form and then
copy


<b>4, Sum up</b>


• Passive form
• Reported speech


<i><b>5, Homework.</b></i>


 Ex 1,2,9


<b>6, Marks and Remarks</b>


...
...


Unit 14 . wonders of the world



* Division: 5 lessons


<b>A. Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss wil be able to:
- Seek information


- Recognine and correct mistakes
- Prepare and complete questionare
- Write a letter to a friend



<b>B. Teaching contents</b>


<i>1. Vocabulary: claim, compile, snorkle, surround, honor, edge, god, memorial, ranger,</i>
wonder, crystal clear, regious, royal, bored ….


<i>2. Grammar:</i>


- Passive form


- Indirected questions with if and whether
- Question words before To- infinitive
- Verb + to- infinitive


<b>C. Teaching aids</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

<b>Date of planning :</b>
Date of teaching :


<i><b>Period 81: </b></i>


Lesson 1: Getting started – listen and read
<b>A. Objective: </b>


<b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to seek information about a language game</b>
to complete a summary


B. Teaching content:
<i>1. Vocabulary: clue, …</i>


<i>2. Grammar: - question words before to- infinitive</i>



C. Teaching aids :


• <b>Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, stereo…</b>


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’
I/ Checking the old lesson


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Getting started: </b></i>


Inform the topic “wonders of the world”
a. Sydney Opera house


b. The Pyramids
c. Stone Henge


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1, Presentation
<i><b>a) Vocabs</b></i>


- Clue (n) gợi ý
- Guessing (n) đoán
<i><b>b)Ordering </b></i>



<i>* How to play the guessing game</i>


1. B. ask questions to find out who or
what it is


2.A thinks of a famous person or place
3.B wins if she/ he can guess the correct
answers


4. A gives B a clue


5. B loses if she/ he can not guess the
correct answer


6. A can only answer “yes” or “no”


- T. prepares some postcards or
pictures of the famous world
landmarks or scene spots in VN.
Shows the pictures one by one to ask
Ss what places they are in two teams.
Gives Ss some suggestions to help
them easily recognize the place.
- Ss work in 4 groups to do the
matching on page 131


- T. introduces the topic and sets the
<i>scene “Nga , Hoa & Nhi are playing</i>



<i>a languague game called guessing</i>
<i>game . How does this game work ?”</i>


Then rearrange the statements and
put them in the riaght order


- Ss listen to the teacher and copy
new words, make sentences .then
repeat them


- Ss read and order in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

2, Practice


<i><b>a)Practice the dialogue</b></i>
<i><b>* Answer key: </b></i>


2 – 4 - 1 - 6 – 3 - 5
<i><b>b) Complete the summary</b></i>


Answer key:


1. game 5. America
2. place 6. golden
3. clue 7. right
4. VN 8. was
<b>* Grammar awareness:</b>
I don’t know how to play it


- S + V1 + WH - qs + to + V2 (inf)


<i>Use: to reduce form of an indirect</i>


<i>question</i>


Eg:


1. I don’t know How to play it
2. Please tell me where to go


<i><b>3, Production</b></i>



*Play games


“Famous places and people”
Key :


-Ha Long Bay
-Hue citadel
- Ho Chi Minh
-Phu Vinh


- Ss listen and repeat after tape. Then
practice in pairs


- T. calls on some pairs to read in
front of the class.


- Ss work individually


- T. asks Ss to read the text silently


- Ss read the text in pairs.


- Ss work in pairs


- Ss listen and answer
- Ss copy


+T divides sts in to 2 teams
+Let sts play games


4, Sum up



 Structure:


<b>5, Homework.</b>


 Learn by heart new words


 read and translate the dialogue into Vietnamese
 Ex 1,2


<i>6, Marks and Remarks</i>



...
...


<b>Date of planning :</b>
Date of teaching :
Period 82



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

<b>A. Objective: </b>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to make a report on famous
places using reported speech. recognize mistakes through listening to an
advertisement


<b>B.Teaching content</b><i><b> : </b></i>


<i>1.Vocabs : relaxing, crystal clear, coral, snorkle</i>
<i>2. Grammar: reported speech</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures , steore


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I/ Checking the old lesson


- Practice the dialogue


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Play game : who is the fastest?</b></i>


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<b> Speak</b>



<i><b>1, Pre - Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>* Matching</b></i>


1. It was designed and built by the
French civil engineer with 300 m in
height


2. It is in South Central Asia 8848 m
height above the sea level


3. It was built from 246 - 209 BC and
some people say it can be seen from the
moon


4. It is a bell striking the hours in the
clock tower of the houses of Parliament
in London.


5. It’s a skycraper in Manhattan, New
York city.


6. It’s a famous place in Quang Binh
province recognized as a world heritage
site by UNESCO


<i><b>2. While - Speaking</b></i>



* Answer key




1. Effel tower
2. Mount everest
3. Great wall of China
4. Big ben


5. Empire state building
6. Phong Nha cave
<i><b>* Questions</b></i>


1. Is Effel tower in Paris?


2. Is the Empire state building located
in the New york city?


3. Are the Petronas Twin towers located


- T. informs the topic and time limit
- Ss write 10 famous places in
America with in 3 minutes


- Give feedback and correct


- T. asks Ss to read the statements
and the names of the famous places
in the box


- T. gets Ss to work in pairs
- Ss work in pairs


- T. checks if Ss understand the


sentences


* Qs:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

in Malaysia?


4. Is the Great Barrier reef in Australia?
5. Have you ever seen Mount
Rushmore?


6. Is mount Everest in Nepal?


<i><b>3, Post - Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>* Grammar</b></i>


 Indirect with Yes/ No question
<i>Ex: I said to Lan: Is Hue citadel in</i>”


<i>central of VN?”</i>


-> I asked Lan if Hue citadel was in the
central of VN.


<i>Form: </i>


S + asked + O + if/ whether + S +Ved
( said -> asked /wanted to know)
<i>- Khi chun th× cịng lïi vỊ mét thêi nh</i>



<i>ë c©u têng tht)</i>


<i>eg: She said : Is HL Bay is a World</i>“


<i>Heritage site?”</i>


-> She asked whether HL Bay was a
world heritage site?


<b> Listen</b>


<i><b>1, Pre - Listening</b></i>



* Vocabulary:


- relaxing (a) nghØ ng¬i
- crystal clear (a) trong nh pha lª
- coral (n) San h«


- snorkel (n) lỈn cã èng thë


<i><b>2, While - Listening</b></i>


<i><b>* Answer: </b></i>


<i>1. Southern - far North</i>
<i>2. inn - hotel</i>


<i>3. rainforest - jungle</i>
<i>4. 6824 - 6924</i>



<i>5. the coral sea - the pacific ocean</i>


<i>- T. sets the scene: Is Hue citadel in</i>


<i>the Central VN?</i>


+ Lan: yes it is .
- T: I asked Lan if Hue citadel was in
the central of VN. She said it was
- Ss listen and find the form. Then
practice in pairs to make similar
sentences


- T. calls on some pairs and asks
them demonstrate


- T. sets the scene and presents some
vocabulary.


- Ss read the advertisement


- T. asks Ss some Qs about
geographical names in. Then plays
the tape (3 times)


- Ss listen and correct the mistakes


- Ss listen to the teacher anf find the
form



4, Sum up



 Reported speech


<i><b>5, Homework.</b></i>


 Do ex 3,4 in the workbook


6, Marks and Remarks


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 85


<b>Unit 14 . wonders of the world</b>
Lesson 3 :Read


<b>A. Objective: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get some knowledge about the
wonders of the world


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: compile, claim, honor, god, religious, royal…</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…



D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I/ Checking the old lesson


- Do exercises.


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


* Play “Hang man”


- coral __ __ __ __ __


- snorkel __ __ __ __ __ __ __
- relaxing __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1,Pre - Reading</b></i>



<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- Ancient Greece (n) Hi Lạp cổ đại
- compile (v) biên soạn


- list (n) liƯt kª


- Hanging gardens of Babylon
- claim (v) tuyªn bè



- honor (v) ThĨ hiƯn sù kÝnh träng
- Buddhist religious center (n) TT phËt
gi¸o


- royal (n) hoµng téc , hoµng gia
- ruler (n) quyÒn lùc


<i><b>b) True/ False prediction</b></i>


<i> 1. An Egyptian man compiled a list of</i>


what he thought wer the seven wonders
of the world


2. The only surviving wonder is the
Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt


- Ss work in two groups


- T. reads the text


- Ss listen and find out new words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

3. Today, we can still see the Hanging
Babylon in present- day Iraq


4. Angko Wat was oringinally built to
honor a Hindu god.


5. The Great wall of China first wasn’t in


the list of 7 wonders of the world


6. In the early 15th<sub> century, the Khmer</sub>
King chose Angko Wat as the new
capital.


<i><b>2, While - Reading</b></i>



<i><b>a)Correct T/F statements</b></i>
Answer:


1. F ( a Greek man named Antipater did
it)


2. T


3. F ( They only surviving wonder is the
pyramid of Cheops in E)


4. T
5. T


6. F ( chose Phnompenh as ….)
<i><b>b) Complete the sentences</b></i>


a. C b. A c. C d. B


<i><b>3.Post- reading</b></i>



<i><b>* Grid </b></i>



Wonders of the world Country


1.Hanging Garden of Babylond
2.The statue of Zeus


3.Pyramid of Cheops
4.Great wall of China
5.Taj Mahal


6.Angkor Wat


<b>Iraq</b>
<b>Greece</b>


<b>Egypt</b>
<b>China</b>
<b>India</b>
<b>Cambodia</b>


- T. plays the tape


- Ss listen and correct the false ….


- T. asks Ss to read the text in pairs to
choose the best answers


- Ss work in pairs


- T. checks and then corrects



- Ss read the text again, then close
the books to fill in the grid


- T. gives feedback


4, Sum up



 Wonders of the world


<i><b>5, Homework.</b></i>


 Learn by heart new words


 Read and translate all the text above into Vienamese
 Ex 6 in the workbook


6, Marks and Remarks


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

<b>Date of planning :</b>
Date of teaching :
Period 86


<b>Unit 14 . wonders of the world</b>
Lesson 4 :Write


<b>A. Objective: </b>


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a letter to a friend about
a place they have visited



<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: ranger, edge, canyon, breathtaking, stone age</i>…..
<i>2. Grammar: Past simple tense</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I/ Checking the old lesson


- Do exercises.


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b>* Guessing game:</b></i>


Wonders of the world


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Writing</b></i>



<i><b>a) Vocabulay:</b></i>


- ranger (n) ngêi b¶o vƯ


park ranger
- guided (a) híng hÉn
- edge (n) lÒ rõng


- canyon (n) hÏm nói , khe nói


- Breathtaking (adj) hÊp dÉn, ngo¹n mơc
- temperate (adj) ôn hoà


<i> *Checking vocabs</i>
<i><b>b)Complete the letter</b></i>
Answer


1 – C 3 – D
2 – B 4 – A


- Ask Ss to think of one of the
wonders of the world and write it on
a piece of paper.


- Call on a student to the front of the
class with his / her paper


- Others Ss ask him/ her “Yes/ No –
Qs” to guess the wonder


- T. sets the scene and asks Ss to read
the letter Tim sent to Hoa about his
trip to the Grand Canyon (đại vực) on
P.135



- Ss work in pairs to complete the
letter by inserting


- T. gives feedback


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

<i><b>* Outline</b></i>


- place


- distance from your city/home
- How to get there


- sights: beautiful, …
- weather:


- How you feel:
2, While – Writing


<b>*Write a letter to a friend</b>


Dear Tim,


a. How / you ?


I / very / happy / get / your / letter / 2 /
weeks / ago.


b.I / just / finished / my exams / I / do /
quite well .



c. My class / just / come back / a trip /
Phong Nha cave / It / 500 km / HN .
d. In Phong Nha cave / every thing / look
/ breathtaking . It /very / cold .


e.We / feel / happy / after / the trip / I /
send / a photo / I / hope / you like it .
f. I / looking forward / to hear / from /
you / soon .


Your freind .
Hoa


3, Post – Writing
<i><b>* Questions</b></i>


S1: Where have you just visited?


S2:……….


S1: How far is it from HB town?
S1: How did you go there?
S1: What is it like?


S1: How about the wether?
S1: How did you feel?


- T. sets the scene: Imagine you have
visited a place recently . Write a
letter to a friend of yours and tell him


or her about that place


- T. draws the outline on the board
and elicit some details


- Ss write the letter


+T gives the main words . Let sts
write the full sentences


+Divide class in to 3 groups


+Have sts write on extra board then
teacher and whole class correct


- T. monitors and assists Ss with their
writing


- Ss make an interview in pairs


4, Sum up



 Write a letter


<b>5, Homework.</b>


 Write complete letter in your notebooks


6, Marks and Remarks



...
...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

Date of teaching :
Period 87


Unit 14 . wonders of the world


<i><b>Lesson 5 : </b></i>

<i><b>Language focus</b></i>
<b>A. Objective: </b>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to report what people ask and answer
and practice in using To – infinitive.


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i> Grammar: </i> - Passive form
 Indirect question


 Question words before to- inf
 To – inf


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


 Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I/ Checking the old lesson



- Read the letter.


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


* Play Bingo: (breathtaking, royal,
religious, canyon, pyramid, god, jungle,
compile


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1, Presentation and practice
<i><b>a)Past simple passive voice</b></i>
Ex:


Sydney Opera House was completed in
Be V-past


1973


<i><b> S + was/ were + V-ed (II)</b></i>
 Language focus 1 :


a. was completed
b. was contructed
c. was designed
d. was presented
e. was reached


 Do the matching



1. construct (v) a. thiÕt kÕ


2. design (v) b. đoàn thám hiểm
3. summit (n) c. x©y dùng


4. expedition (n) d. hớng dẫn viên
5. guide (v) e. đỉnh núi


<i><b>b)Indirect question with if/whether</b></i>“ ”
ex: Do youknow My Son , Nga ?


<b>- >Nhi asked Nga if / whether she knew</b>


- Ss do as direction


- T. asks Ss to retell the form of past
simple passive


- Ss review the form


-T. asks Ss to do the ex


- T. writes the words on the small
board


- Ss work individually
* Answer:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

S Vp
My Son



S + asked + O + if/whether + S + Vp
- Language focus 2 :


b. Nhi asked Nga Myson was in QN
c. many people lived at. .
<i><b>c)Question word before To -inf</b></i>


ex: Nga told Nhi how to go there
Q.w To -inf


S + V (O) + Q.w + To-inf
- Language focus 3


* Word cue drill (Oral drill)
a.Nga told Nhi how to go there
b.Nga showed Nhi where to get . ..
<i><b>d) Verbs + To-inf</b></i>


Eg: - I want to go out at the weekend
- She enjoys swimming very much
- He can speak E well


<i>Form:</i>


<i>1. S + V+ to + V </i>


<i>(Most of the verbs in E are followed by</i>
<i>a to inf)</i>



<i>2. S + V + V.ing (enjoy, love, like, hate,</i>
<i>start, begin…)</i>


<i>3. S + Model verbs + V- inf</i>


- Language focus 4


1 – jogging 5 – to reach
2 – go 6 – to continue
3 – gathering 7 – get


4 – raining


- Ss work individually


-Show the word cue chart on the
board


+Model the first sentence
-Is this a question ?


-Is it a statement ?


-Is after “how” a N or a To-inf ?
- Ss look at the cue and say
- T. gives feedback.


4, Homework.



 Review for the second test



5, Marks and Remarks


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 88


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

<i><b>A/ Objectives:</b></i>


• <i><b>By the end of the lesson , Students will be able to review tenses and vocabulary</b></i>
learnt from unit 12 to unit 14


<b>B/Teaching procedure</b>
*Grammar


<i><b>1.Past progressive with “when and while”</b></i>
Ex:


<b>The family was sleeping when the mailman came</b>
be V-ing Vp


<b>The family was sleeping while Peter was doing homework</b>


be V-ing be V-ing
<i><b>2.Present simple with “always”</b></i>


Ex:



Ba is always forgetting to do his homework.
<i>XII.</i> <i>3.Passive voice</i>


Ex:


<b>They will hold an English-speaking contest next month</b>


<i><b> > An English-speaking contest will be held next month 4.Reported speech Ex: I </b></i>
am a plumber


 > He said he was a plumber *)Reported speech with “if and whether” Ex:
Do you know the Pyramidof Cheop ?


 > Nga asked me if/whether I knew the Pyramidof Cheop
<i><b>5.Compound adjectives</b></i>


N – V-ing


Ex: A rice-cooking contest


6.Question words before to –V-inf
Ex:I ask Lan where to live


<i><b>7.To-inf</b></i>


 Dicide , try , want . . . + To-V-inf


 Start , begin , like , love , enjoy , hate . . .+ V-ing



<i><b> Modal verbs :can , may . . . + V-bare *Exercises I . Chän a, b, c hc d </b></i>
1.Let’s ………to the festival together


going b. goes c. went d. go


2.What’s a ………contest?


a. fire-make b. fire-making c. fires-making d. fire-makes


3. He ………..in the pub<i>( quán rợu) when his wife</i>him.
a. is sitting/seeing b. sits/sees


c. was sitting/saw d. sat/saw


<b>4.I …………..Cuba in 1990</b>



a.visit b. visiting c. visited d. have visited

<b>II. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc </b>


<i>XIII. 1.I</i> <i>( never/be) ……….to China before.</i>


2.Would you mind ( wait) ………for a few minutes?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

<b>IV.</b> <b>Đổi những câu sau đây sang câu trần thuật (Gián tiếp) </b>


<i>1.She said to me : “Are you hungry?”</i>


 She asked …...


2.They said to her: “Do you like English?”



- They asked...………...
3. Tom said: “I can sing an English song”


- ………
4. He said: “I am so busy now”


- ………


<b>4, Homework.</b>


 Prepare for the second test


5, Marks and Remarks


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 89


<b>Written Test 4</b>


A/The aim .


 Listening : listen to the dialogue then choose the best answer
 Reading : read the text about John then answer true or false
 Writing : write sentences use the words given .


 Language focus : circle the best answer to complete the sentences .



B/Ma TrËn


Chủ đề Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng


TN TL TN TL TN TL


1. Listening 5


2,5 5 2,5


II. Reading 5


2,5 5 2,5


III.Writing 5


2,5 5 2,5
IV.Language


focus 10 2,5 10 2,5


<b>Tæng</b> <b>10</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

C/Content


<i><b>I.Listening</b></i>


 Listen to the dialogue then choose the best answer (2,5 pts)
1. His favorite country is . . . ..



Canada b. the USA c. Britain
2. She is . . .


American b. Britain c. Canada
3. She will . . . .


come to dinner b. go away c. invite him to dinner
4. Where are they going to stay ?


In a hostel b. in a guest house c. in a hotel
5. What kind of hotel are they talking about ?


a. An expensive one b. An inexpensive one c. Both a and b are incorrect
<i><b>II. Reading</b></i>


<i>*Read the text below and decide whether the following sentences are True ( T ) or False</i>
<i>( F )2,5 pts</i>


On Christmas Eve everything is rush and bustle . Offices and public buildings close at
one o’clock , but the shops stay open late . Most big cities , especially London , are
decorated with colored lights across the streets and enormous Christmas trees . The main
line stations , trains and buses are crowded with people traveling from all parts of the
country to be at home for Christmas .


In the homes there is a great air of expectation . The children are also decorating the
<i>house with colored lights . Christmas cards – with the words “ A Merry Christmas to</i>


<i>You” or “ Wishing You a Merry Christmas and Prosperrous New Year” . . . are arranged</i>



on shelves , tables and sometimes hung round the walls 6. The shops close at one’
o’clock on Christmas Eve .


7. Colored lights are decorated across streets in bigs cities .
8. All the people are at home on Christmas Eve .


9. Trains and buses are almost empty on Christmas Eve .
10. Colored lights are also decorated at home .


<i><b>III. Language focus</b></i>


<i>*Choose the best andwer in a , b , c or d to complete the sentences(2,5)</i>


1. John ………..in the restaurant when his wife………him.


a. is sitting/seeing b. sits/sees c. was sitting/saw d. sat/saw
2.What’s a ………contest?


a. rice-cook b. rice-cooking c. rices-cooking d. rice-cooks
3. Khai is always . . . TV so much .


a. watch b. watching c. is watching d. watches
4. She asked me if I . . . . .thirsty .


a. am b. is c. was d. were
5. I told Lan what . . . . there during the visit


a. to do b. do c. doing d. does
6. I often watch television . . . the evening .



a. on b. in c. at d. of


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

a. when b. at the time c. at the present d. while


8. Hamlet . . . by Shakespeare .


a. written b. wrote c. was written d. did written
9.That book was written . . . Charles Dickens .


a. at b. by c. from d. of


10.Yesterday while I was cooking dinner , my father . . . in the garden .


a. was doing b. doing c. were doing d. did


<i><b>IV.</b></i> <i><b>Writing</b></i>


<i>Write a postcard use the words given ( 2,5 pts)</i>


1. I / have / a wonderful / time / Ha Long Bay .
2. Weather / cool / sunny


3. In Ha Long / I / visit / my friend


4. I / buy / alot of / souvenirs / my friends
5. See / soon


Dear Lan ,


...


...
...
...
...
Love .


. . .


<i><b>Key:</b></i>


I . Listening


Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm


1 . B 2 . A 3 . B 4 . C 5 . B

<b>Tapecripts :</b>



1.A : You’ve traveled a lot . Which country do you like best ?


B : Well , I prefer the United States to Britain and Canada because it has a
variety of landscapes and people .


2.A : Where do you come from ?
B : From the USA .


3.A : Come and have dinner with my family .


B : Thanks . I’d love to . But I have to leave tonight .
4.A : Are we going to stay in a hotel ?



B : Well , in a guest house because all the hotel are full .
5.A : Is it expensive to stay here ?


B : Well , I don’t think so . The room rates are reasonable .

<b>II.Reading </b>



<i>Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm</i>


1. F 2 . T 3 . F 4 . F 5 . T
IV.Language focus


Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,25 điểm


1 . a 2 . b 3 . d 4 . c 5 . a
6 . b 7 . d 8 . c 9 . b 10 . a


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

<i>XIV.</i> <i>Tổng số 2,5 điểm . Mỗi câu đúng 0,5 điểm</i>
Dear Lan ,


I am having a wonderful time inHa Long Bay .
The weather has been cool and sunny


In Ha Long I visited my friend


I bought alot of souvenirs for my friends
See you soon .


Love .
Thu



<b>D/Remarks and marks</b>


...


...


Date of planning :
Date of teraching :
Period 90


<i><b>Correcting the test</b></i>


<b>A/Aim</b>


 After correcting students can find out their mistakes


B/Teaching procedure


<i><b>I.Listening</b></i>


 Listen to the dialogue then choose the best answer (2,5 pts)
1. His favorite country is . . . ..


b. the USA


2. She is . . . .. Britain
a.American


3. She will . . . .


b. go away


4. Where are they going to stay ?


c. in a hotel


5. What kind of hotel are they talking about ?
b. An inexpensive one


<i>XV.</i> <i>II.</i> <i>Reading</i>


<i>*Read the text below and decide whether the following sentences are True ( T ) or False</i>
<i>( F )2,5 pts</i>


On Christmas Eve everything is rush and bustle . Offices and public buildings close at
one o’clock , but the shops stay open late . Most big cities , especially London , are
decorated with colored lights across the streets and enormous Christmas trees . The main
line stations , trains and buses are crowded with people traveling from all parts of the
country to be at home for Christmas .


In the homes there is a great air of expectation . The children are also decorating the
<i>house with colored lights . Christmas cards – with the words “ A Merry Christmas to</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

on shelves , tables and sometimes hung round the walls F - 6. The shops close at one’
o’clock on Christmas Eve .


T - 7. Colored lights are decorated across streets in bigs cities .
F - 8. All the people are at home on Christmas Eve .


F - 9. Trains and buses are almost empty on Christmas Eve .
T - 10. Colored lights are also decorated at home .



<i>XVI. III.</i> <i>Language focus</i>


<i>*Choose the best andwer in a , b , c or d to complete the sentences(2,5)</i>


<i><b>1.</b></i> <i><b>John </b><b>………</b><b>..in the restaurant when his wife</b><b>………</b><b>him.</b></i>


a. is sitting/seeing


2.What’s a ………contest?
b. rice-cooking


N- Ving


<i><b>3.</b></i> <i><b>Khai is always . . . TV so much .</b></i>


<i><b>b.</b></i> <i><b>watching </b></i>


<i><b>4.</b></i> <i><b>She asked me if I + V-past. . . . .thirsty .</b></i>


<i><b>c.</b></i> <i><b>was </b></i>


<i><b>5.</b></i> <i><b>I told Lan what . . . . there during the visit</b></i>


a. to do


<i><b>6.</b></i> <i><b>I often watch television . . . the evening .</b></i>


b. in


<i><b>7.</b></i> <i><b>I was playing the piano . . . .. my brother was doing the crosswords .</b></i>



<i><b>d.</b></i> <i><b>while</b></i>


<i><b>8.</b></i> <i><b>Hamlet .+ be + Vp.p . . . by Shakespeare .</b></i>


c. was written


9.That book was written . . . Charles Dickens .


b. by


<i><b>10.</b></i> <i><b>Yesterday while I was cooking dinner , my father . . . in the garden .</b></i>


<b>a.</b> <b>was doing </b>


<i><b>IV.</b></i> <i><b>Writing</b></i>


<i>Write a postcard use the words given ( 2,5 pts)</i>


Dear Lan ,


I am having a wonderful time inHa Long Bay .
The weather has been cool and sunny


In Ha Long I visited my friend


I bought alot of souvenirs for my friends
See you soon .


Love .


Thu


<i><b>C/ Homework</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

<b>D/Remarks and marks</b>


...


...


Unit 15 . computers



* Division: 5 lessons


<b>I.Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:
- Recognize facts and opinions


- Express opinions
- Agree and disagree
- Complete a flow chart
- Write a set of instruction
<i>XVII. II.Contents</i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: adjust, connect, fix, install, post, under guarantee, concern, degree,</i>
document, challenging, skeptical, properly….


2. Grammar:


- Present perfect with already and yet


- Past simple


<b>III. Teaching aids</b>


- Stereo , Pictures, cards , Small board


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 90


<i>XVIII. Lesson 1:Getting started </i>–<i> listen and read</i>


<b>A. Objective: </b>


<b> By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to express their opinions about a </b>
proplem


<b>B. Teaching content:</b>


<i>1. Vocabulary: printer, manual, how to use, connect, under guarantee, plug, </i>…


<i>2. Grammar: - Present perfect with “yet and already”</i>


<i>C. Teaching aids : </i>


<i>•</i> <b>Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards, stereo…</b>


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’


I/ Warm up


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

<i>II/ New lesson </i>


1. Presentation
<i><b>a/ Vocab:</b></i>


- printer (n) (picture) m¸y in
- print (v) in


- connect (v) kÕt nèi


- properly (adv) đúng cách , thích hợp
- plug (n) ghim , cái phích
- come out of (v)


- Be under guarantee (n) trg tg bảo hành


<i><b>b/Who says what ?</b></i>


1. The printer isn’t working
2. Have you turned on ?


3. I know how to connect a printer
4. I bought it in HCM city


5. Let’s phone them now
2.Practice


<i><b>a)Checking who says what </b></i>


1. Nam 2. Mr.Nhat 3. Nam
4.Mr.Nhat 5. Nam


<i><b>b)Practice the dialogue with a partner</b></i>


<i><b>c) True / False</b></i>


1. The printer isn’t working


2. Nam has already turned the computer
on


3. Nam knows how to connect a printer
but he hasn’t connected it properly


4. The manual helped them to find out
the problem


5. Mr Nhat bought the computer in
HCM city


Key


1. T 2. T


3. F -> He has connect it
4. F -> It’s not very helpful.
5. T


3.Production


<i><b>* Fact or opinion</b></i>
a, F d. F
b. O e. F
c. O f. O


- Posible answer:
+ save time


+ learn interestingly
+ get information
+ chat with the others
+ book tickets


- T. introduces the topic and sets the
scene and asks question:


<i> What happens to the computer?</i>
- Ss asnswer the question, listen to
the tape and copy new words, make
sentences.then repeat them


-Have sts close the book . look at the
board


+Ask sts hear conversation between
Mr.Nhat and Nam and who says
what .


-Sts listen



+Ask sts open their book and listen
+T plays the tape <2 times>


-Sts listen and check


- T. asks Ss to listen and repeat after
the tape


- Call on some pairs to read in front
of the class.


-Correct’s sts pronunciation


- Ask Ss to read the dialogue
carefully and check T/ F statements
- Ss give the answers


- T. checks the answer


-Let sts do in (3’)
- T. checks the answer


How
computer can


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

E, Homework.



 Read and translate the dialogue
 Ex 1,3



<i>F/. Marks and Remarks</i>



...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 91


Unit 15 . computers



<i>XIX.</i>

<i><b>Lesson 2: </b></i>

<i>Speak + Listen </i>


<i><b>A.</b></i> <i><b>Objective: </b></i>


By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use some common useful
expressions to express agreement and disagreement and write a set of instruction on
how to use the wending machine and complete a flow chart


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>Grammar: express agreement and disagrement</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures , radio


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’


I/ Check the old lesson


- Practice the dialogue
- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


* Play guessing game :
Do you think that….?


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<b> Speak</b>


<i><b>1, Pre - Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>a, Brainstorming:</b></i>


Useful expressions to express agreement
and disagreement


Opinion Agreement Degree of.. Dis . . .
I like ...


I don’t...
I think....
I feel...
Idon’t
believe....



So do I
I agree...
You’re
right ....
Neitherdo I


I agree but
Yes, but on
the other
hand . . .


I disagree.
I can’t
agree with
you
No, I think


<i><b>b, Matching</b></i>


1. reading books - b
2. playing in the rain- c


- Ss do exercises


- Ss think of one of the ways
computers are helpful


- T. puts the table on the board


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

3. driving a car- a


4. foreign food- d


<b>2, While - Speaking</b>


<i><b>a) Oral drill (speak 1)</b></i>


T: I think driving a car is easy


S1: I disagree. I think it is difficult to
driver a car


S2: so do I
* Suggestions
a. Driving a car


- learning to drive a car
b. comic books


- reading comic books
c. playing in the rain
d. fopreign food


<i><b>3, Post - Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>* Open pairs/ close pairs (speak 2)</b></i>
Lan: I’m having…….


Ba: what’s wrong?


Lan: It doesn’t work . I think….
Ba: No you didn’t …..



Lan: Oh sorry


<b> Listen</b>


<i><b>1, Pre - Listening</b></i>



- Circle : starting/ stopping point
- Triangle: Questions


- Oval: Answers


- Insert coin <v> nhét , đa đồng xu vào
- Press button <v> ấn nút


- T. erases the words but leaves the
pictures


- Ss use the adjs (P.140) to express
their opinions after going through the
meaning of some new words


- easy once we get used to it


- dangerous/ challenging/interesting
- boring/fun/consuming….


- fun/ interesting/…


- fun to eat/ delicious/


unhealthy…….


- T. sets the scene and presents the
dialogue


- Ss demonstrate the dialogue. Then
make similar ones refering the cues
on page 140 to replace the
information.


- Ss work in pairs


- T. gives some words anf guiges
- Ss. work in individually


- T. uses the chart to introdure the
symbles


- Ss listen and remind
- T. gives feedback


T: asks Ss to tell the use of some
phrase verbs


- Ss guess the words before listening
- T introduces “ How to get a drink”
from a machine


- T puts the flow chart on the board
have sts copy it in to notebook.



- T. plays the tape


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

<i><b>2, While - Listening</b></i>


<i><b>Answer:</b></i>



a. Do you have the correct change?
b. Yes


c. what do you want to drink?
d. take it


3.Post – Listening
<i><b>*Write it up</b></i>


E/ Sum up



 Useful expresstions


 How to use the wending machine


<i><b>F/Homework.</b></i>


 Do ex 3,4 in the workbook


<i><b>G/Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...



Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 92


<b>Unit 15 : Computers</b>



<i><b>Lesson 3</b></i>

<i><b>: Read</b></i>


<b>A. Objective: </b>



By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know more about how computers work in
a university


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i> Vocabulary: freshman, jack, bulletin board, skeptical, impact…</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

<i>I/ Warm up</i>


* Play “Jumble words”


<i>1. terpirn - printer</i>


2.nimorot - monitor


3. bdoaryke - keyboard
4. reesnc - screen


<i>II/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Presentation</b></i>



<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- store (v) lu trữ


- telephone line (n) đg dây ®iƯn tho¹i
- acces (v) truy cËp


- freshmen (n) SV năm thứ nhất
- jack (n) ỉ c¾m


- restrict (v) giíi h¹n
- bulletin board (n) b¶n tin


- technology (n) C«ng nghƯ häc
- Skeptical (a.) Hoµi nghi
- Concern (n) Mèi quan t©m
- Impack (n) ¶nh hëng
<i>* Checking vocabs</i>


<i><b>b) Suggestion Qs:</b></i>


1. Where in the library do we find
information ?



2. How can we store the information?
3. If we want to discuss sth, how can we
do?


<i><b>2, While – reading</b></i>



<i><b>a)True /False statements (P.141)</b></i>
a. T


b. T
c. T


d. F – now have computers jacks
everywhere


e. T
f. T


<i><b>3, Post - Reading</b></i>



<i><b>* Comprehension Qs</b></i><b> (P.142)</b>


a. It has no library. All the information
normally found in a library is now stored
in university’s computers.


b. All the information normally found in a
library or messages normally found on a
bulletin board



c. A computer and a telephone.


d. With a bulletin board on Internet a


- Ss work in two groups


- T. reads the text


- Ss listen and find out new words


- T. introduces the topic of the text
and asks Ss what they are going to
read


- T. asks Ss to read the text again
after guessing


- Ss guess. Then read the text
silently, and do True/ False


- T. plays the tape


- Ss listen and correct the false ….
- T. asks Ss to read the text to answer
the qs


- Ss work individually


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

gread number of people can get acces to


the bulletin board.


E, Sum up



 How computer work in a university.


<i><b>F, Homework.</b></i>


 Learn by heart new words


 Read and translate all the text into Vienamese
 Ex 5 in the workbook


<i><b>G, Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


<b>Date of planning :</b>
Date of teaching :
Period 93


<b>Unit 15 : Computers</b>



<i><b>Lesson 4 : </b></i>

Writing


A. Objective:


• By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write a set of instruction on
how computers work in a university


<b>B. Teaching content</b><i><b> : </b></i>



1. Vocabulary: paper input tray, power button, icon, output path, remove…
2. Grammar:


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I/ Check the old lesson


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i><b> Word square: </b></i>


words related to a computer


- T. devides the class into two teams
and asks each team to go to the board
to write their answers as fast as
possible


- Ss. work in 2 teams
Answer:


: output, monitor, tray, power


: screen, icon, mouse


: computer, printer, key board


<b>C</b> <b>N</b> <b>E</b> <b>E</b> <b>R</b> <b>C</b> <b>s</b> <b>K</b>


<b>O</b> <b>U</b> <b>T</b> <b>P</b> <b>U</b> <b>T</b> <b>P</b> <b>E</b>


<b>M</b> <b>O</b> <b>N</b> <b>I</b> <b>T</b> <b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>Y</b>


<b>P</b> <b>A</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>O</b> <b>C</b> <b>I</b> <b>B</b>


<b>U</b> <b>H</b> <b>B</b> <b>C</b> <b>D</b> <b>E</b> <b>N</b> <b>O</b>


<b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>A</b> <b>Y</b> <b>O</b> <b>D</b> <b>T</b> <b>A</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<i><b>1, Pre - Writing</b></i>



<i><b>a) Vocabulary</b></i>


- paper in put tray (n) khay ®a giÊy vào
- screen (n) màn hình


- power button (n) nót më ®iƯn
- icon (n) biĨu tỵng
- output path (n) lèi ra
<i><b>b) Matching</b></i>



<i><b>Key:</b></i>



a – 3 d – 2
b – 1 e – 6
c – 4 f – 5
<i><b>* Gap- fill</b></i>


- wait …


- remove ….sth
- turn… a machine
- plug ……. sth
- load ……. Sth


<i><b>2, While - Writing</b></i>


<i><b>* Answer:</b></i>



- Plug in the printer and turn on the
power


- remove the old paper and load the new
paper input tray


- wait for the power button to falsh


- have the pages appear on the computer
screen


- click the printer icon on the screen and
wait for a few seconds



- the printed paper will get out from the
output path in a minute.


<i><b>3, Post - Writing</b></i>



<i><b>* Correction: </b></i>


-T uses the picture on p.142 to elicit
words from sts


- T reads words then wirte


- Ss look at the ex 1 and do the
matching


- T. gives feedback


- T. asks Ss to tell the use of some
phrase verbs


- T. gives feedback and correct.


- Ss look at the pictures (P.143) and
read the cues. Then work in pairs to
outline the instructions


- Call on some Ss to say out the
instructions



- T. corrects and gives the correct
answer.


E, Sum up



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

<i><b>F, Homework.</b></i>


 Do Ex 6, 7


<i><b>G, Marks and Remarks</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :


Date of teaching :
Period 94


<b>Unit 15 . computers</b>



<i><b>Lesson 5 :</b></i>

<i><b>Language focus</b></i>
A. Objective:


By the end of the leson ,Ss will be able to use “yet” and “ already “ to express
the present ferfect tense


<b>B. Teaching content</b><i><b> : </b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: V - ed (II) , </i>



<i>2. Grammar: The present perfect tense</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids :</b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures, cards…


D. Teaching procedure


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’
I/ Check the old lesson


- Do exercises


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


<i> * Play: Lucky numbers</i>“ ”


1. What does your father/ mother do?
2. What did you do last night?


3. Lucky number


4. How often is Hue festival held?
5. Lucky number


6. What were you doing at 8 o’clock last
night?


<i>III/ New lesson </i>



1, Presentation


<i><b>a/ Present perfect with yet/ already</b></i>
Eg: Has Ba done his homework yet?
<b> Has Ba tidied the room yet?</b>
<b>- yes, he has already done</b>


- already: have already + Ved(II)
- yet: cuèi c©u


*Form:


S + have/ has + already +VII


- T. devides the class into 2 teams.
Writes 6 numbers on the board


- Ss play in two teams


- T. sets the scene then asks Qs and
elicit the answer form


- Ss answer and find theform


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

<i><b>b/Comparison of present perfect and</b></i>
<i><b>past simple</b></i>


ex1 :



<b>Her family moved to HN 2 years ago .</b>
V-past


Ex2:


I have never met such an intellegent
VII


<b>boy before .</b>


<i> past present</i>


<i> past simple present perfect</i>


*The usage:


-Past simple : diễn tả hđ sảy ra trong QK
( đã kết thúc )


-Present perfect : diễn tả hđ bắt đầu sảy
ra trong QK và cịn tiếp diễn ở HT có thể
kèo dài đến tơng lai


2, Practice


<i><b>* Language focus 1 – P. 144</b></i>
Answer:


- … I have already done my homework.
- … I haven’t tidy it yet.



- … I have already turned it off


- … I have already called and told her
yet.


<i><b>* Language focus 2 </b></i>– P.144
Eg:


T: Has the flight to VN departed yet?
S: yet, it has already departed


T: Has the flight from Los Angeless
arrived yet?


S: No , It hasn’t arrived yet
<i><b>* Language focus 4 </b></i>– P.146


1. have – seen - did – see – saw
2. haven’t had


3. have been
4. have – heard
5. happened
6. had
7. fell
8. broke


9. have – arrived – has – did –
arrive - arrived



3, Production


<i><b>* Language focus 3: P.146</b></i>
Answer key


finished incomplete


C 


out the different between 2 tenses


+Ask sts to take note


- Ss work in pairs to complete the
open dialogue


- T. gives correct answer
- Ss act out the dialogue


- T. asks Ss to look at the flight
information tables and parcatice
asking and answering in pairs


- Ss work in pairs
- T. gives feedback


+Ask sts to complete the dialogue on
p.146



+Call on some pairs to give their
answers


- Sts give answers


+T gives feedback and correct


+Have sts demonstrate the dialogue
for the class


+Correct sts’ pronunciation


* Revision


- T. asks Ss to look at the table on
page 146, read the sents and check v
the correct columns


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

D 


E 


F 


g 


- T. gives correct answer


<b>E, Homework.</b>



 language focus 2, 3, 4


<b>F, Marks and Remarks</b>


...
...


Unit 16. Inventions



* Division: 5 lessons


<b>I. Objectives</b>


By the end of the lesson , Ss wil be able to:
- Say what smth was like


- Talk about processes
- Write about a process


II. Contents


<i>1. Vocabulary: crush, grind, liquify, manufacture, conveyor belt, facsimile, </i>
hairdryer….


2. Grammar:


- Passive form
- Sequence markers


III. Teaching aids



- Stereo ,Pictures, cards , Small board


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 95


Lesson 1: Getting started – listen and read
A. Objective:


<b>By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know the origin of paper and talk about </b>
the process of producing smth


B. Teaching content:


<i>1. Vocabulary: remove, crush, liquify, grind, manufacture, process </i>… …
<i>2. Grammar: - passive voice</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher s and Ss activites </i>’ ’
I/ Check the old lesson


<i>- Do exercises</i>
<i>II/ Warm up</i>


* Quiz: who did it?


<i><b>* Getting started: Suggestions</b></i>
- Where are they from?


- What is the man in the picture doing?


- What is it?


Key:


A – b
B – c
C – e
D – a
E – d


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


1. Presentation
<i><b>* Vocab:</b></i>


- foreman (n) cai thỵ


- manufacturing process (n) quy trình sx
- cacao bean (n) hạt ca cao


- remove (v) bãc ra , bá ®i
- crush (v) nghiÒn


- liquify (v) lµm thµnh chÊt láng
- grind - ground (v) xay nhá


- roll (v) c¸n
- mold (n) khu«n


- conveyor belt (n) băng truyền


<i>*Checking vocabs</i>


<i>-Slap the board</i>


2, Practice


<i><b>a/Practice the dialogue with a partner</b></i>


<i><b>b/Matching</b></i>


a - E d - F
b - D e - B
c - C f - A


<i><b>3,Production</b></i>



<i><b> * Grid</b></i>


chocolate manufacturing process
Answer:


S: work in 2 groups


T. asks Ss to look at the pictures and
ask them some qs to evaluate how
much they undersatnd the pictuers
- Ss read the sentences A- E and
match them with the correct pictures


- T. introduces the topic and sets the


scene:


- Ss listen to the teacher and then
repeat new words ,copy new words
- make sentences.


<i>-T sets the scense : “ Tim Jones</i>


<i>Hoa s American penpal is visiting a</i>’


<i>chocolate factory with his class and</i>
<i>teacher Mrs.Allen”</i>


+Ask sts to guess who will show
them around the factory


- Ss guess before reading - T. asks Ss
to listen and repeat after the tape
- Ss listen and repeat after tape. Then
practice in pairs


- T. calls on some pairs to read in
front of the class.


- T. asks Ss to read the text silently
and match in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

1. The bean are washed , weighed and
cooked



2. The shells are removed


3. The beans are crushed and liquified
4. Cocoa butter, sugar, vanilla and milk
are added


5. The mixture is ground, rolled and
poured into the molds


- T. check the answer


E, Homework.



 Learn by heart new words


 read and translate the dialogue into Vietnamese
 Ex 1,2


<i>F,Marks and Remarks</i>



<i>...</i>
<i>...</i>


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 96


Unit 16. Inventions



<i>XX.</i> <i>Lesson 2: Speak + Listen</i>


A. Objective:


By the end of the leson ,Ss will be able to talk about the inventions using passive.
listen and read information about papermaking ang inventions.


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


1. Vocabulary: facsimile, reinforced concrete, microphone, X-ray, loudspeaker,
Helicopter


2. Grammar: passive voice in simple past


<b>C. Teaching aids : Ss’ books, small boards, pictures , radio</b>
D. Teaching procedure:


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I/ Check the old lesson


- Do exercises.


<i>II/ Warm up</i>


* Play game : Bingo


(foreman, process, manufacture, remove,
crush, grind, pour, mold, liquefy…)


<i>III/ New lesson </i>


<b> Speak</b>



<i><b>1, Pre - Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>a/ Vocabulary</b></i>


- Fascimile (n) m¸y fax


- T. asks Ss to brainstorm a list of 10
words and write them on the board.
Then asks Ss to choose any 4 words
and copy them into their paper.


- Ss call out the words untill someone
has ticked all of his or her words and
<b>shout Bingo</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

- Reinforced concrete (n) bê tông
- X- ray (n) m¸y chơp X-quang
- Loudspeaker (n) loa ph¸t thanh
- Laser (n) kỹ thuật laze
- Printing press (n) nhà máy in
- Optical fiber (n) Sỵi quang
<i><b> b/ Grammar:</b></i>


<b>- Passive form</b>


eg:


This is where the coca beans are stored
That botton can not be touched



The bean are washed


Form : S + Be + V- ed (PII)

<i><b>2, While - Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>a)Word cue drill:</b></i>


S1: What was invented by Friedrich
Koenig?


S2: Printing press


S1: When was it invented ?
S2: in 1980


S1: Where was Koenig from?
S2: He was from Germany
* Answer


Invention Date Inventor Nation


Printing Press 1810 Fried rich German
Bicycle 1816 Karl D.Saner German
Facsimile 1843 Alexander Bain English
Sewing machin 1845 Elias America
Rein fored


concrete 1849 F.J Monier French
Micro phone 1878 D.E Hughes USA


X - Ray 1895 Wilhelm


Konarad German
Loudspeak 1924 C.W.Rice America
Color TV 1950 Peter Carlgold USA
Optical 1955 Narinder German
Optical fiber 1958 Gordon . . . . USA


<i><b>3, Post - Speaking</b></i>



<i><b>* Making reports</b></i>


Eg: The printing Press was invented by
Friedrich Koeing in 1810


<b> Listen</b>
1/ Pre- listening:
<i><b>a/Vocabulary</b></i>


- Procedure (v) tiÕn tr×nh
- Pulp (n) bét giÊy
- Vat (n) chum , bÓ
- Drain (v) làm khô nớc
- Roll (v) cuộn tròn


- Smooth (v) làm cho phẳng , nhẵn
- Convey (v) vận chuyÓn


<i><b>b/Checking vocabs : What and Where</b></i>



inventions using Vietnamese


-Ask sts to read the dialogue on
p.148 again and pick out all of the
passive sentences


-Call on sts to give their answer
-Have sts review the passive in the
present and past simple tense


- T. gets Ss to work in pairs
- Ss work in pairs


T: checks if Ss understand the
sentences


* Qs:


T: asks Ss to write yes/no question
about 10 places in the box, using the
information in the matching


- Ask Ss to complete the table to
report what they have found


-T makes model and have sts report ,
ask sts to use the complete table to
repeat what they have found


-Sts make sentences


T: Introduce new words
Ss: listen and repeat


+Elicit words from sts and write
them inside circles


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

2/While - listening:


<i><b>Gap- fill: Paper- making process</b></i>
* Answer key:


1. simple
2. same


3. two hunderds
4. left


5. rollers


3/ Post- listening :
<i><b>- Ordering prediction:</b></i>
Answer:


C – d – a – e - g – f - b


T: inform the topic


Ss: work in pairs, read the sentences
T: play the tape



Ss: listen


T: give feedback


+Ask sts to read the sentences a - > f
carefully and guess the order


+Write sts’ prediction on the board
then play the tape again and ask sts
to listen


+Call on sts to give answer then give
feedback and correct


IV.Homework

.



 Do ex 3,2 in the workbook


V. Marks and Remarks


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 97


Unit 16. Inventions



<i>XXI.</i> <i>Lesson 3: Read</i>


A. Objective:


By the end of the leson ,Ss will be able to know some inventions of Alexander
Granham bell.


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: Microwave , toaster , vacuum , hair dryer , dish washer , . . . </i>
<i>2. Grammar: passive voice in simple past</i>


procedur


e pulp


drain

- convey


<sub>smoot</sub>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures


D. Teaching procedure:


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I.Warm up


<i><b>-Network</b></i>



II.New lesson
1.Pre – reading
<i><b>a/Vocabs</b></i>


- Microwave (n) lß vi sãng
- Toaster ( n) lß níng thÞt
- Vacuum (n) m¸y hót bơi
- Hair dryer (n) m¸y sÊy tãc
- Dish washer (n) máy rửa bát


- Air conditioner (n) máy điều hoà N§
<i><b>b/Checking vocabs</b></i>


- Bingo
2.While – reading
<i><b>*Matching </b></i>


a.What’s the first verse about ?
b. Is the second verse about the
appliances used in the kitchen ?
c. What are “doom” chugga-chug ?


1. b
2. c
3. a


3.Post – reading
<i><b>* Gap fill</b></i>



1. Vacuum
2. Telephone


3. Washing machine
4. Microwave


5. Hairdryer
6. Toaster


-Let sts make a list of things in the
house


-T explains some vocabs then write
on the board


-Let sts repeat in choral


-Ask sts to choose any 4-5 words and
copy them in to sts’papers


+Call out the words until someone
has ticked all of their words and
shout “Bingo”and wins


-T introduces then read the poem
-Get sts to read the poem p.151
-Ask sts some qs to help them
understand the reading more
-Sts try to answer



+Have sts match the heading to the
verse p.152


-Sts do the matching


-Tell sts to read sentences carefully
and fill in the gaps with the


inventions taken from the poems
-Have sts compare their answer with
their partners


-Call on some sts give the answer
and correct


-Sts give the answer


-Call some sts to read aloud the
poem


-Sts read aloud


IV.Homework



 Do exercise on work book


<i><b>V.Remarks and marks</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

...
...



Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 98


Unit 16. Inventions



<i>XXII. Lesson 4: Write</i>
A. Objective:


By the end of the leson ,Ss will be able to use the sequence markers to describe
a manufacturing procedure


<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: log , flatten , chip , refine , chemically </i>


<i>2. Grammar: the sequence markers : first , then , next , after that , finally</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures


D. Teaching procedure:


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I.Warm up


<i>- Jumbled words</i>
1. LPPU – PULP



2. LLREOR – ROLLER
3. MOREVE – REMOVE
4. BREFI – FIBRE


II.New lesson
1.Pre – Writing
<i><b>a)Vocabs</b></i>


-Log (n) khúc gỗ


-Flatten (v) làm cho b»ng ph¼ng
-Chip (n) l¸t máng


-Refine (v) tinh chÕ
-Chemically (adv) ho¸ chÊt
<i>*Rub out and remember</i>
<i><b>b)Gap fill</b></i>


<i><b>c )Question</b></i><b> : </b>


1. What is cut into chips?


2. What are chips mixed with before
they are crushed to heavy pulp?


3. why is the pulp passed through rollers
4. What’s the last step in paper making?


1. first 4. After that


2. then 5. then


 Put the card boards with jumb
word on the board


 Inform the topic : words
related to paper making
procedure


+ T uses picture or draw to explain
some vocabs. Then vocabs and write
- Sts repeat then copy


+ Ask sts to read the text on (p.15)
and fill the gaps with the right
sequence market to describe the
procedure of paper – making.
- Sts read the text and complete
+ Ask sts some qs to check if they
understand the text.


- Sts answer


+ Call one some sts to read the
completeed sentences


- Sts read


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

3. next 6. Finally
<i><b>d) Ordering picture:</b></i>


1.d 4. c
2. a 5. b
3. c 6. f


2. While – writing:


4. Post – writing:
<i><b>* Language focus 4:</b></i>


<b>First, the rice crop is harvested then the </b>


<b>rice plants are threshed .Next, the rice </b>
grains are husked in the mill to produce
brown rice


<b>After this, the bran is removed in the </b>


<b>mortar and it is . Finally winnowed to </b>
produce white rice.


of chocolate – making and put the
pictures in the correct order.


+ Call on some pain to give their
answer


- Sts give their answer


+ Ask sts to listen to check if their
answer are correct or not



+ T reads the sentences aloud
- Sts listen


+ T gives feed back and correct
+ Ask sts to rearrange the sentences
p.153 according to the orderred
pictures.


- Call on some sts to give their
answers.


+ Hwve sts use the sequence makers
to link the sentences together in a
paragraph (5’)


- sts write


+ Call on some sts to read their
writing for the class.


- sts read


+ give feed back and correct


+ Ask sts to use the picture and the
word cues p.155 to write a


description of how while rice is
produced in the tradition way using


sequence snarkers


+ Have sts complete the sentences
orally firts


- Sts speak infront of the class
+ Ask sts to write the paragraph in
their exercise note book


- Sts write.


IV/ Homework



 Do exercise on wordbook


<i><b>V/ Remarks and marks.</b></i>


...
...


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
Period 99


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

<i>XXIII. Lesson 5: Language focus </i>
A. Objective:


By the end of the leson ,Ss will be able to change active sentences in to passive
ones and write wh-qs in the passive .



<i><b>B. Teaching content:</b></i>


<i>1. Vocabulary: run a business , around the corner , due to</i>
<i>2. Grammar: - Passive form</i>


<b>C. Teaching aids : </b>


• Students’ books, small boards, pictures


D. Teaching procedure:


<i>Teaching contents</i> <i>Teacher and Ss activites </i>’
I.Warm up


<i><b>-Pelmanism</b></i>


Inf Past participle
Write written
Draw drawn
Sell sold
Win won


Run run
II.New lesson


1.Presentation
<i><b>a)Vocabs</b></i>


-Run a business : q. lý điều hành 1
doanh nghiệp



- Around the corner : rất gần


- Com.Ltd : công ty trách nhiệm hữu hạn
- Due to = because of : bëi v×


b)Structure


<i><b>*Past passive form</b></i>


Ex:Miss Lien wrote the letter
S Vp O


- >The letter was written by Ms.Lien
S be V.p.p O
Form :


S + V.p + O


S + be + Vp.p + by + O
2.Practice


Exercise 1 p.154


a. The document was typed by Mrs.Q
b.The computer was repaired by Mr.N
c.The picture was drawn by Ba


d.The lights were turned off by H
e.The cake was backed by Lan.


Exercise 2 p.154


a. was awarded . . .
b. . . . won . . . .
c. . . ran . . . .


+T divides class in to 2 teams


+T explains some vocabs
-Sts read then copy


+T gives examples then explains
+Ask sts some qs to check their
understanding


+T has sts do exercise then call some
sts to give their answer before the
class while others write on the board
-Sts give the answers


+T gives feedback and correct


+Have sts do exercise 2 then ask sts
to compare their answer


-Sts do exercise


+Call some sts to read their answer
and others write on the board



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

d. . . . . was run / was sold
e. . . . was closed .


3.Production
Exercise 3 p.155


a. The zipper -> what
b. Maize -> what / when
c. By Lewis . . -> who
d. In Hungry -> where
In copy machines -> in which


+T gives feedback & correct


+Go through the underlined words
with sts before have them write qs
+Let sts to work in pairs


+Let sts to work in pairs then call
some pairs to demonstrate in front of
the class.


Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 100</b>


<b>revision</b>
<i><b>I. Aim:</b></i>


• Students will be able to review all structures, tenses and vocabulary learnt in


English 8


<i><b>II.Content:</b></i>
A. Tences:


- present simple
- present cont
- present perfect


B.Teaching procedure


<b>I/Present simple tense</b>


<i><b>1.The usage</b></i>



<b>a. Diễn tả 1 hđ , 1 thói quen</b>



<b>Ex : I usually have breakfast at 6</b>



<b>b. §Ĩ nãi vỊ 1 sù việc 1 cách chung chung hoặc 1 sự việc thờng xuyên </b>


<b>xay ra hoặc lặp đi lặp lại , 1 sù thËt hiĨn nhiªn</b>



<b>Ex : The earth goes around the sun </b>



<b>Nurses look after patients in hospital</b>



<b>c. Nãi vÒ thêi gian biểu , chơng trình làm việc < giao thông công </b>


<b>cộng , rạp hát ></b>



<b>Ex : The buses arrive at 7.30 and leave at 8.30 a.m</b>


<b>d. Thì HTĐ chỉ hành động tơng lai</b>




<b>Ex:What time do they finish work ?</b>


<b>At 5 p.m</b>



<b>e. Dùng với các trạng từ thờng xuyên , côm tõ nh :</b>



<b>- Always , often , never , sometimes , usually , occasionally , once or </b>



<b>twice a week , on Mondays , every + N</b>


<b>Ex:every week</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

<b>Month</b>



<b>Ex: She goes to the movie theater once a week</b>


<i><b>2.Form </b></i>



<b>S + V<es,s> . . . .</b>



<b> S + don t/doesn t + V-inf . . . </b>



<b>(?) Do /Does + S + V-inf . . . . ?</b>


<b>Yes , S + do/does</b>



<b>No , S + do/does + not</b>


<b>3.Notes</b>



ã

<b>Động từ đi với ngôi thứ 3 số Ýt < she, he , it > + S</b>



<b>V kết thúc : Y trớc Y là 1 phụ âm ta đổi Y -> i + ES</b>


<b>Ex : try -> tries</b>




<b>Cry -> cries</b>



<b>- V kết thúc = Y trớc đó là 1 nguyên âm + ES</b>



<b>Ex : play -> plays</b>


<b>Obey -> obeys</b>


<b>II.Present progressive tense</b>


<b>1.The usage</b>



<b>- DiƠn t¶ 1 hđ đang diễn ra tại thời điểm nói hoặc xung quanh thêi </b>



<b>®iĨm nãi </b>



<b>Ex: Let s go out now . It isn t raining anymore</b>


<b>- Nói về các tình huống đang biến đổi</b>



<b>Ex: The population of the world is rising very fast</b>



<b>- Adverbs :now , right now , at the moment , at the present , at this </b>



<b>moment </b>



<b>Ex: He is reading a book now</b>


<b>2.Form </b>



<b>(+) S + be <is,are,am> + V-ing ...</b>



<b>(-) S + be not <isn t,aren t,amnot> + V-ing . . .</b>




<b>(?) (wh.) Be + S + V-ing . . .?</b>



<b>Yes , S + be > < No, S + be +not</b>


<b>III/Present perfect tense</b>



<b>1.The usage </b>



<b>- Diễn tả 1 sự việc xảy ra trong QK nhng kq còn liên quan đến HT </b>



<b>hc võa míi chÊm dø ë HT</b>



<b>I have studied E since 2002</b>


<b>She has lost her key</b>



<b>- Diễn tả 1 sự việc xảy ra trong QK hoặc không xđ đợc Tg</b>



<b>I have been to HCM city before</b>



<b>- Adv : (+) recently , lately , just , already , never</b>



<b>(-) yet </b>



<b>(?) yet , ever </b>


<b>*For : kho¶ng tg</b>


<b>*Since : mèc tg</b>



<b>This is the first time , It s the second time . . .(để nói đây là </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>

<b>- This morning / this week / this evening / today . . .( các khoảng tg </b>




<b>cha kết thúc ë lóc ®ang nãi </b>


<b>2.Form </b>



<b>(+) S + have/has + Vp.p . . .</b>



<b>(-) S + have/has + not + V p.p . . . .</b>


<b>(?) (Wh) Have/Has + S + Vp.p . . . ?</b>


<b>Yes , S + have/has</b>



<b>No,S + have/has + not</b>


<b>3.Notes </b>



<b> Thì HTHT không dùng víi ago</b>



<b>Choose the best answer in the blankets.</b>


1. It’s ( become/ becoming) more and more dangerous to travel by air.
2. The last time we met her was (when/ since) we left school.


3. They (didn’t work/ haven’t worked) in that factory since last Monday.
4. My uncle is the same (old/ age) as hers.


5. What time (does the train leave/ is the train leaving) tomorrow?
6. Her brother doesn’t enjoy (playing/ to play) badminton.


7. Run (fast/ fastly ) and you can catch the bus.


8. We’re (pleasing/ pleased) to hear that you passed the driving test.
9. Hung promised to try (him/ his) best in learning English.



10.You’d better send it by surface mail. It’s (much/ many) cheaper.


<i><b>IV/ Homework</b></i>


 Do exercise on wordbook


<i><b>V/ Remarks and marks.</b></i>


...


<b>...</b>



Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 101</b>


<i><b>revision </b></i>

<b> </b>


<i><b>I. Aim:</b></i>


• Students will be able to review all structures, tenses and vocabulary learnt in
English 8


<i><b>II.Content:</b></i>


 Past simple
 Past progressive
 Future simple


<i><b>B.Teaching procedure</b></i>



I- Past simple ( Thì QK đơn ) :


(+) S + V2 /(ed )
(- ) S + didn’t + Vbare....
(? ) Did + S+ Vbare ....?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>

II- Past progressive ( Th× QK tiÕp diƠn ) :


(+) S + was/were + V-ing


(-) S + was/were +not + V-ing
(?) Was/Were+ S + V-ing....?


<b>Yes , S + was/were >< No,S + was/were + not</b>



<i>Time expressions : at that time , at that moment, at </i>….o’clock /between …..
and ….. last night, while, as, when…


- When


<b>Ex: The Le’s family was sleeping when the mailman came</b>


<i><b> Be V-ing V-past</b></i>


<i>*Use :diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra trong qk thì 1 hđ khác xen vào , hđ xen vào dùng</i>
<i>thì qk đơn , thờng đi với liên từ “when”</i>


- While


<b>Ex:I was reading book while my mother was cooking meal</b>


be V-ing be V-ing


III- Future simple :


S + will + Vbare...
S + will + not + Vbare...


Will + S + Vbare...?


<i>*Use :diễn tả hành động đang diễn ra trong TL</i>


 Will : dùng trong câu đề nghị , lời hứa và ngỏ ý giúp đỡ


<i>Time expressions : tomorrow, next, someday, soon, tonight, in the future ….</i>


<b>IV.Present progressive with “always”</b>


Ex: Ba is always forgetting to do his home work


<i><b>II)Practice</b></i>


*) Choose the right words to fill the blanks


1. My brother and I ………our homework everynight ( do/does/are doing)
2. Are there ………..flowers in the garden?( a/this/any)


3. Are you and Tuan students? Yes, …….are (you/we/they)
4. you……….turn left here ( must to/can to/can’t)


5. There is a stadium ……….my school ( next/near to/ behind)



6. Minh and the farmer are loading the truck ……..vegetables ( at/from/with)
7. Ha’s sister ……the piano at the moment ( plays/is plays/ is playing)


8. ………….does Hoang go to school? - By bicycle ( when/how/what)


9- When I entered the room, the baby……..quietly ( is sleeping, was sleeping,
slept, were sleeping )


10- Our friends …..meet us at the airport tonight ( are, are going to, will be
to, go to )


 Choose a, b, or c to complete the sentence.


1. My father used to ...us many stories when were small.


a. told b. tell c. telling


2. She enjoys ...about farm life.


a. talk b. talking c. to talk


3. He ...when I was writing a letter.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>

4. Why ...she go to your party?- She was busy.


a. doesn’t b. didn’t c. don’t


5. Those books are interesting, …?



a. are there b. aren’t there c. aren’t they
6. Her son is interested ……….soccer.


a. of b. on c. in


<i><b>IV/ Homework</b></i>


 Do exercise on wordbook


<i><b>V/ Remarks and marks.</b></i>


...


<b>...</b>



Date of planning :
Date of teaching :
<b>Period 102</b>


<i><b>revision </b></i>

<b> </b>



<i><b>I. Aim:</b></i>


• Students will be able to review all structures, tenses and vocabulary learnt in
English 8


<i><b>II.Content:</b></i>


1. adjective + enough to + V
2. To be going to + V



3. Model verbs: must, can , could, may, might, shall, will, would, have to…


4. Reflexive pronouns: myself, himself, herself, itself, themselves, yourself ( ves),
ourselves


5. ued to


6. Comparisions ( of adjectives)
7.Getting /becoming


B.Teaching procedure
<i>XXIV. I.</i> <i>Structures:</i>


1. adjective + enough to + V


Ex:


I am lucky enough to have a lot of friends
2. To be going to + V


We are going to visit HN next week


3. Model verbs: must, can , could, may, might, shall, will, would, have to…
S + model verbs (not) + Vbare...


4. Reflexive pronouns: myself, himself, herself, itself, themselves, yourself
( ves), ourselves


Ex: He lives by himself in that large house. :



 Ta sử dụng RF khi chủ ngữ và tân ngữ đồng nhất nhằm nhấn mạnh vào S hoặc
O.


- Sau giíi tõ chỉ nơi chốn không dùng RF.
- Sau giới từ đi kÌm víi §T dïng RF


5. used to


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>

Did you use to get up early ?
+ S + used to + V


- S + didn’t + use to + V
? Did + S + use to + V ?


*The usage



 Express a past habit or an action usually happened in the past.
6. Comparisions ( of adjectives)


<b>Ex1: The red book is the same as the yellow one </b>
<b>Ex2: The red book is as big as the yellow one</b>


<b>Ex3: The yellow book is different from the brown note book </b>
<b>Ex4: The yellow is not as/so big as the brown note book</b>
Form :


(5) S + be + the same as ...
(6) different from ...
(7) as + adj + as ...



(8) not + so + adj + as . . .


7.Getting /becoming :đi với tính từ chỉ sự thay


đổi trạng thái



Ex: The boys are getting tall
<i>XXV. II.</i> <i>Practice</i>


 Choose a, b, c or d


1. “Did you type the story yourself ?”
 No , I had my sister ……it


a. to type b. typing c. type


2. Does your sister know …….?


a. to cook b. how cooking c. how to cook
3. She is my ………….friend


a. sister b. sister is c. sister’s
4. Can she ……….a car?


a. drive b. drives c. driving
5. Is she going to……..you this semester?


a. visit b. visits c. visited


6. What are you doing, Mai? - I’m looking at………….in the mirror



a. my b. myself c. mine


7. You…………to go to the market yourself and buy some food


a. must b. should c. ought


8. You must……….electrical sockets so that children do not try to put anything into
them.


a. cover b. keep c. place


9. She used to cook the meal and …………..the garden


a. watered b. waters c. water
10.The doctor asked the patients ………….to bed on time


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199>

<b>11-John is……….age as my brother </b>


a. as b. the same c. same so
*Write a postcard .


a. I / Ha Long Bay .


b. People / friendly . Weather / warm and windy .
c. I / visit / my old friends and teachers .


d. I / see / parks , zoo .


e. I / buy / souvernirs / seafoods .



f. I / wish / I / can / visit Ha Long Bay again .


<i><b>IV/ Homework</b></i>


 Do exercise on wordbook


<i><b>V/ Remarks and marks.</b></i>


...


...
Date of planning :


Date of teaching :
<b>Period 103</b>


<i><b>revision </b></i>

<b> </b>



<i><b>I. Aim:</b></i>


• Students will be able to review all structures, tenses and vocabulary learnt in
English 8


<i><b>II.Content:</b></i>


<i><b>B.Teaching procedure</b></i>


I. Structures:



<i><b>1.Reported speech , reported questions</b></i>


 Reported speech


S + said <that> + clause


-Reported questions



 Y/ N – questions


S + asked + O + if +clause
whether


Wh question



S + asked + O + q-w + clause


2.Passive Be + V- ed

( II)


<b>1.</b> <b>Present simple</b>


S + am/is/are + Ved(II)
<i>2. Future simple</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>

<b>3.</b> <b>Past simple</b>


S + was/were + Ved(II)
 Change active to passive
<b>Eg: - They take the dog to the park</b>



The dog is taken to the park
<i><b>+)Note</b></i>


1. Tân ngữ của câu chủ động sang làm chủ ngữ của câu bị động
2. Chia to be cho phù hợp với thì và chủ ngữ của câu


3. Viết động từ cử câu chủ động ở dạng QK phân từ


4. Chuyển chủ ngữ của câu chủ động sang tân ngữ và đặt sau “by”
3. It’s adj….


Eg: - It’s happy to meet our friends
 It’s interesting to read books


<b>Form: It’s + adj + to + V</b>



<i><b>4..Câu đề nghị với : </b></i>


 Do / Would you mind + V-ing ?
 Do / Would you mind if ...?


Ex : Do you mind closing the door ?
Ex :Do you mind if I open the door ?
Would opened


 Match A and B ( 2 m)


<b>A</b> <b>B</b>



1. Are you listening to music?
2. What is opposite your house?


3. Are there any bookstores on the
street?


4. Where is Nga going?


5. How do your sisters travel to Hue?
6. What are they doing?


7. Can your father play table tennis?


a. to the post office
b. By train


c. yes, I am
d. No , he can’t
e. No, there aren’t
f. a movie theater


g. they are waiting for a bus


IV/ Homework



 Do exercise on wordbook


<i><b>V/ Remarks and marks.</b></i>


...



</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×